to the last place afore handled out of the New Testament this vision much enlightening that Parable in ver 26 27. the close expounding that Parable as the Preface ver 11 12. explaines that it concernes the time following upon the ruine of the foure Monarchies § 2 In the eleventh and twelfth verses the foure Beasts that is the foure Monarchies are slaine as it is expounded after verse 17. The foure great Beasts are foure Kings instead of them Daniel sees in a vision ver 13 14. One like the Sonne of Man come WITH THE CLOVDES of Heaven and came to the Ancient of dayes and they brought him neere before him which notably agrees with that place last spoken of Luke 19.11 c. where it is said Christ went into a farre Country to receive to himselfe a Kingdome and returne And that visibly saith this of Daniel with the Clouds or in the Clouds as Rev. 1.7 in way of Preface to this his Kingdome Rev. 11. Rev. 20. And saith Daniel ver 14. There was given to him that was like the Son of Man DOMINION and glory and a KINGDOME that all People Nations and Languages should serve him Just as Luke 19.15 according to the Greek he returned receiving the kingdom When he visibly returned he received a Kingdome here below else why did he returne Adde that here below he exercised visible destruction upon his enemies for it is not said as of the unworthy Talenter he cast them into utter darknesse but he caused them to be slaine afore his face SECT II. Of the second place of Scripture out of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Jer. 25.5.6 Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto David a righteous branch and a King shall reigne and PROSPER and shall execute JUDGEMENT AND JUSTICE in THE EARTH In his dayes Judah shal be saved and ISRAEL SHALL DWELL safely and this is his name whereby hee shal bee called THE LORD OVR RIGHTEOVSNESSE § 1 FIrst it is evident by the last clause that the Lord Christ is the person here meant it being his incommunicable name Act. 4.12 2 Cor 5. last § 2 Nextly It is as apparent by the whole Series of Jeremiahs Prophesie that this relateth to the times after Judahs Captivity in Babilon Israel having been carried away captive long afore § 3 Lastly It is beyond all objection that Christ did yet never so reigne upon earth as this Text holds forth as may be made appeare with few words in these particulars 1. Christ must reigne and prosper That is must be every way glorious and successefull so that Judah and Israel shall owne him for their King and call him the Lord their righteousnesse 2 He shall execute justice and judgement in the earth it is not said he shall preach justice or judgement or execute it in heavenly places but he shall execute it upon or in the earth 3. In his dayes JUDAH shal be saved and ISRAEL shal dwell safely viz. being gathered out of all Countries ver 3. But the Lord Christ did yet never thus reigne Instead of reigning and prospering in the eyes of Israel and Iudah he was as a branch blasted a thing accursed Isa 53. ver 3 4 c. so that the Iewes for the generall dis-owned him proceeding against him as a Malefactor guilty of many of the highest Crimes and for matters of Iustice and Iudgement in the earth he refused to meddle with the smallest matters as to give his opinion touching the Adulteresse or to divide the inheritance Nor then nor yet ever did Israel returne from Captivity and dwell safely if wee might say Iudah did at Christs first coming in the flesh as we may not because they were then under the Heathen Roman power as conquered and tributaries Luke 3.1 § 4 Nor may any put this off with Christs Spirituall reigning for so he did alwayes from the Creation but this is in the future tense hee shal reigne to signifie his reigning so as never before SECT III. Of the third Scripture âât of the Old Testament for Christs visible appearance at the great restauration of the Church Zach. 2.10 11 12. compared with Zach. 14. ver 4 5 6 7 8 9. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of Jerusalem for loe I come and will DWELL in the midst of thee saith the Lord. And many NATIONS shall be joyned to the Lord in that day and shall be my people and I will DWELL in the midst of thee and the Lord shall INHERIT Judah his portion in the holy Land and shall CHOOSE JERVSALEM AGAINE And his feet shall stand in that day upon the Mount of Olives and the Lord shall bee King over ALL THE EARTH In that day there shall be one LORD and his name one ZEchary Prophesied after their returne out of Captivity in Babilon see Zech. 1.1 compared with 2 Chron. 36.22 Ezra chap. 1. ver 1. c. to the end Therefore this was not fulfilled in their return for it is spoken of a future time to come And Spiritually God did alwayes dwell among his people and therefore nor can that be the full meaning of this place And when Christ came and was incarnated this Text was not fulfilled for then many Nations were not joyned to the Lord to be his people nor so much as the generality of any one Nation the Heathen Romans then inherited the portion of Judah and filled all Countries with their persons or powers and instead of Christ then choosing Jerusalem againe he pronounced woe against it and gave it up to desolation which accordingly about forty yeares after Christs Passion was fulfilled Mat. 23. three last and Matth. 24.1 2 c. Nor was the Lord King over all the earth more then he had been before Christs Incarnation Instead of one Lord over all there were many SECT IIII. The fourth place in the Old Testament for Christs personall appearance Micha 4. vers 1 c. to 8. In the last dayes it shall come to passe that the Mountaine of the House of the Lord shall be established in the top of the Mountaine and MANY NATIONS SHALL COME AND SAY Come let us goe up to the Mountaine of the LORD and HEE shall JUDGE AMONG MANY PEOPLE and rebuke the NATIONS afarre off and they shall BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES NATION SHALL NOT LIFT UP A SWORD AGAINST NATION neither shall they learne warre any more but they shall sit every man under his Vine and under his Fig-tree and NONE SHALL MAKE THEM AFRAID In that day I will assemble her that halteth and will gather her that was driven out and her that I have afflicted and I will make her that was cast off a STRONG NATION and the Lord shal REIGN OVER THEM IN MOVNT ZION FROM HENCE-FORTH and FOR EVER NOw when was ever this since the Creation much lesse was it performed at Christs Incarnation when the Jewes were under the Roman power obstinate
be changed in a moment in the twinckling of an eye at the lad Trumpet for it shall sound both the dead shal be raised incorruptible and we shal be changed * So according to the best Greek Copies howbeit the common translation holds forth effectually what we intend Saint John in the Revelation tels us that the last Trumpet is the seventh Trumpet according to the many instances wherein God delights in the number of seven so that six as it is exprest in the Revelation sounded afore this and saith That the last end of all is not till the last Trumpet But there is a great intervall and space within the time of the last Trumpet many things being to be done within that compasse so that at the first beginning of the last Trumpet the enemy so falls that the Kingdomes of THIS world become the Kingdomes of the Lord and of his Christ that is ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã of the Lord his Christ in spight of all enemies and their anger the dead Saints are raised and a reward given to them Revel chap. 11. ver 15 16 17 18. which is a summary preface or a prefaciatory sum to the Catastrophe or upshot of the Revelation to follow unto the end as touching the Saints And in Revel 20. first seven verses is expressed how long this visible Kingdome of Christ on earth shall be and consequently so long is the space of the last Trumpet viz. a thousand yeares But the last end of all the ultimate period shall not be till the last end of the last Trumpet Revel 20. vers 12 c. Now let the Reader compare and consider all that Paul hath spoken in this quotation of and upon the one hundred and tenth Psalme touching the subduing of all things to Christ and the five notes of the time when it must be together with Johns explication and confirmation of Pauls last Trumpet and then let him tell me 1 Whether these things must not of necessity be fulfilled upon the earth 2 Whether these things are not yet to come yet to be fulfilled 3 Whether they must not be fulfilled afore the ultimate end of all when Christ resignes up his Kingdome to the Father 7 ¶ But there is yet one quotation more of this hundred and tenth Psalme insisted upon by the Apostle which gives us further light in Heb. 10. ver 11 12 13. Every Priest saith he standeth daily in ministring and offering oftentimes the same sacrifice which can never take away sin but this man after he had offered one sacrifice for sinnes SATE DOWNE ON THE RIGHT HAND OF GOD FROM HENCE-FORTH EXPECTING TILL HIS ENEMIES BE MADE HIS FOOT-STOOL c. Two things are here at first sight evident before our eyes viz. 1. That the Apostle quotes the words of the one hundred and tenth Psalme And 2. That the Apostle applyes them to explaine the eminency of Christs Priesthood above the Leviticall in that the Leviticall Priests offered daily Christ but once they oftentimes the same Sacrifice he only once they tooke not away sinnes he did they stood as Servants he sate downe as Lord according to Psal 110. ver 1. Now observe how this suits to our purpose For it is expresse here that Christ did effectually attaine to reigne spiritually in overcoming Sinne and Satan witnessed in making perfect attonement for the sinnes of all that are sanctified and his overcoming death the wages of sinne And the Divel the Gaoler of death by his Resurrection Ascension and Assession at the right hand of God whereby in regard of the place he got above all his enemies And yet for all this to that very houre that the Apostle wrote this Christs enemies were not made his footstoole But saith he still there he sits from THENCEFORTH EXPECTING TIL his enemies be made his footstool as he doth to this day Plainly signifying that Christ must have another-gates Regiment and Government another manner or degree of subduing his enemies then that Which can be no other then a sensible visible subduing of them Which as we on earth expect so he in heaven saith the Apostle sits continually expecting the same For his enemies on earth continuing his enemies under that notion so to be subdued are never subject to him spiritually And further as the Apostle minds us Christ expects that further subduing of his enemies upon his Fathers promise made to him Psa 110. Now at the ultimate day of judgment there is no more subduing of any thing to Christ seeing then Christ layes down all and he the same himself is subject 1 Cor. 15. Therfore this being yet unfulfilled must be performed afore that day and according to the sense of the 110 Psalm of which all this while we have spoken but upon the first verse There are divers other passages more in this Psalme that much concurre to and explaine our point 8 ¶ Verse 2. The Lord shall send the rod of thy STRENGTH out of Zion Rule thou in the MIDST OF THINE ENEMIES Mr. Ainsworth and our New Annotationists parallel this with Psal 2. And withall assert that the Jewish Expositors generally doe acknowledge the second Psalme to be concerning the Messias and infer if that then there is as much reason for this Now as in Psal 2. it is said Christ shall rule his enemies with a ROD OF IRON and breake them incorrigible as a Potters vessel even so in this Psalme it is said the Rod of Christs STRENGTH * ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã not of authority or power which I should wonder if any dare to restraine to meer spirituall efficacy especially if we heedfully observe that which follows Rule thou as with that Rod * ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in the middest of thine enemies Now tell me how doth Christ rule spiritually in the middest of his enemies And if you grant with us that a sensible corporal rule must be here admitted then cast about and consider that Christ hath no rule at the ultimate day of judgement 1. Cor. 15. And before that to this day Christ hath not so ruled amidst his enemies in most Nations Therefore it is yet to come afore the ultimate day of judgement Verse 3. Thy people shall be willing or Voluntaries in the day of thy power or Armie as Ainsworth asserts Now Peter assures us that the great day of Christ is a thousand yeers 2 Pet. 3. And wee must of necessity yeeld that this day of power must signifie a distinct determinated time and then to be measured out when Christs power shall most eminently appeare above any former appearance Now whether we take this in a spiritual sense of acting grace after conversion or in an Ecclesiastical as our Annotationists that Christs people shall be assembled unto his Church whose increase shall be as it follows so abundant and wonderful as the drops of the dew falling from the womb of the morning or in a corporal sense that men shall bee willing to pull downe Christs
ãâã ãâã ãâã c. as it is the Hebrew of purpose to multiply his Princedome and for peace without end The Jewes observe that the close-shut ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã mem in the middle of a word as here in ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã which ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã properly is a finall letter signifies the stability of the thing spoken of as open ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in the end of a word as in ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Nehem. 2.13 which ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã properly is a middle letter signifies the brokennesse of the walls there spoken of which observation I mention not as a foundation strong enough for me to build upon but as a sufficient Narrative to declare the opinion of the Ancient Jewish Rabbins concerning the stability of the Messiahs Kingdome Thirdly That the words Princedome Government and for peace and spoken in a way of Prophesie of what should be added to the Church above that they injoyed already cannot but signifie more then Spirituals Fourthly That this is yet more apparent by that which followes both here and Luke 1.32 of the Messiahs sitting upon the Throne of DAVID and upon his Kingdome and to establish it with Justice and Judgement speaking in the phrase of an excellent politick Government It needs not that Christ should sit on Davids Throne and Kingdome to Spiritually governe and keep in peace his universall Church Nor needed there a Promise that Christs Spirituall Kingdome shall be established with Justice and Judgement which are low things to faith hope love joy in the Holy Ghost and the rest of the Graces of the holy Spirit Nor was there need to assert the perpetuity of Christs Spirituall Kingdome that it should be for ever the Jewes having now been a Church so many hundreds of yeares Fifthly The close in a way of Gods great engagement the zeale of the Lord of Hoast will performe this must of necessity signifie something more then the ordinary thing of Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth What need such high words solemne protests and most serious pawning of the zeale of God which is love in a flame to signifie the performance of that which had been long since done and as an ordinary thing was to continue viz. Christs having a Spirituall Kingdome on earth Sixthly Both this of Isaiah and that of Luke 1.31 doth import That after there should be an interruption of the sitting of Davids race upon Davids Throne it should sensibly appeare that Christ should possesse that Throne else why is it here Prophesied that the Messiah shall sit upon Davids Throne and that the Lord God shall give to the Messiah the throne of his father David and promiseth there he shall sit for ever The whole Earth long before Gen. 1.26 c. compare Psal 8. Heb. 2. ver 7 8. being given up to the rule of Christ to be governed by his invisible providence was never interrupted but in all Ages Christ hath continually powred downe his Judgements upon the wicked as Peter proves in his second Epistle Chap. 2. And the Church was also given to him from the beginning Gen. 3.15 compare Rom. 16.20 which without any possible impediment he hath ever preserved on earth in all Ages ever since by his Spirituall power and grace But the Line of Davids race hath been broken off from his Throne as we shall see presently Nor hath Christ been upon it at all in any visible manifestation therefore this last must be a great part of the meaning of Isaiah and Saint Luke as Piscator expresseth it In solio Davidis tanquam haeres regni filius Davidis sedebit Christus confer 2 Sam. 7.12 c. so he And that to be performed for ever that is so as no visible power must reigne after him Seventhly Isaiah Prophesies in the time of the division of the Kingdome of the Jewes into Judah and Israel see chap. 1. ver 1. c. And Saint Luke tells us chap. 1. ver 33. that this must be fulfilled by Christs reigning over the whole house of Jacob which containes all the twelve Tribes made up of Israel and Judah even as according to Isaiah Christ must sit upon the Throne of David who ruled over both Judah and Israel Eighthly That all these must be so fulfilled that Christ must appeare to be wonderfull and mighty and to increase in his Government as Isaiah speaks and to be Great as Luke speakes § 6 Having thus digged into the meaning of the Text let us next lift up our eyes and take a view of all the Transactions of Christ since this Prophesie and see what of this text hath been really fulfilled Surely this text was not fulfilled in the Jewes returne from Babylon for the ten Tribes did not then returne to make up the house of Jacob or the Kingdome of David And besides of that prosperity there was soone an end in the miseries of the Maccabean Warres and the Roman Conquest was over them afore Christ was borne § 7 Nor was it ever fulfilled since Christs coming in the Flesh for he never yet sate upon the Throne of David nor any other deputatively for him of that Tribe the Scepter being then and thence to this day departed from Judah The visible Government as the text imports was not all this time upon Christs shoulders the time was not come as Christ tells us Act. 1.6 7. Act. 3.21 The visible Government since Christs coming in the Flesh hath been upon the shoulders of the Roman Emperour or the Pope or the Turke When the time comes that the Government shall be on Christs shoulders he shall reigne as David as Isaiah speakes and over the house of Jacob as Luke speakes that is over all the twelve Tribes and that for ever that is none visibly ruling them after him But at Christs Incarnation only two Tribes were about Jerusalem and Judea but under the Romans visible Government and for the generall refused Christs spirituall Government Act. 13.46 8 Nor can this be imagined rationally to be fulfilled in Christs Spirituall § 8 government for this Spiritual government if we may so call Christs giving of Ordinances and grace into the heart extending it self equally to Gentiles as wel as to Jewes if not more for these one thousand six hundred and fifty years past to the Gentiles what priviledge or preheminence is given in this to Jacobs House or Davids Throne more then to the houses or thrones of Constantine the Great or Charles the Great or of Edw. the sixth or of Q. Elizabeth or of the Indian Sagamores or of the Turkish Emperours or Grand-Signiours or of the great Chams of Tartar or c. when they or their Nations are converted at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles Besides who of Beleevers at the time of this Prophesie did not know that Christs Spirituall Kingdome of Grace should be for ever and full of more then Justice and Judgement viz. of all the graces of the
without consideration of Gods hand in it and should manage the rod with insolent cruelty to the Jewes that God will bring destruction upon the Assyrian for deliverance of the Jewes The confirmation of this deliverance as is the manner of God in the Prophets hath its foundation laid in the sending of Christ Chapter 11. The promise whereof and description of whose person we have set forth and characterised in the first five verses There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. and the Spirit of the Lord shall rest upon him the Spirit of wisdome c. and he shall not judge after the sight of his eyes but with righteousnesse shall he judge c. So that although in Hezekiahs time wherein Isaiah prophesied the host of the Assyrians were destroyed to the number of one hundred eighty five thousand by the Angel of the Lord 2 Kings 19.35 And againe in the time of Judahs captivity in Babylon they were overthrown with a mighty destruction by the Medes and Persians Dan. 5.30 yet these are not the ALL of the Threat of this Prophesie against Assyria for the Threat is carried on still in Zach. 1.15 to the end of the Chapter though at that time Judah was returned And to keep to this our Text of Isa according to the length of the foundation of this Prophesie must the superstructure be extended viz. to the comming of Christ which coming of him being not restrictively determined to his first coming in his incarnation must be left at large to reach to his second coming at the great Restauration as the Text doth seem to require in mentioning his judging v. 3. his smiting the earth v. 4. c. For we must know to give you Mr. Medes notion Alicubi as neare as I can That the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ INDEFINITLY and in GENERALL without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more cleerly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and altogether which we who are now more fully informed by the Revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a twofold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike may be applied to both Which notion of Mr. Mede is the more to be acknowledged in that it may appeare by many instances from the Creation hitherto that the grand promises of great deliverances have their successive and graduall fulfilling from their first promulgation unto the end of this world as daily experience produceth fresh testimonies Calvin on Isa The context saith Isa 10.24 c. Thus saith the Lord O my people that dwellest in Zion be not affraid of the ASSYRIAN Hee shall smite thee with a rod and shall lift up his staffe against thee after the manner of EGYPT For yet a very little while and the indignation shall cease and mine anger IN THEIR DESTRUCTION c. And in that day his burden shall be taken away from thy shoulder c. Now in Hezekiahs time the Assyrian did not smite the Inhabitants of Zion but were smitten by the Angel of the Lord as afore mentioned Nor was the burden of the Assyrian taken away from off the shoulder of the dwellers at Zion at their returne from Babylon by a destruction on them under whom they were then in captivity For the Lord stirred up the spirit of Cyrus their King voluntarily to let them return as we well know the story in the second of Chron. Chapter last and Ezra Chap. 1. And further the Apostles do bring downe many passages of this eleventh of Isaiah unto the Transactions of their times and downwards applying them to the coming of Christ yea to the coming of Christ after his ascention For example ¶ 1. First that in verse 1. There shall come forth a rod out of the stem of Jesse c. is applied by the Apostle Act. 13. v. 22. c. to v. 42. to Christ as the eminent seed of David of the seed of Jesse conjoyning a quotation out of Psal 2. Thou art my Sonne this day have I begotten thee which with other passages in that Psalme as hath been demonstrated signifies Christs visible Kingdome on earth yet to come And a quotation out of Isaiah 55.3 Touching the sure mercies of David And one other quotation out of Ps 16. That his holy one saw no corruption of purpose to prove that though David himselfe be dead yet Christ lives to be the sure mercies of David and to keep off his seed from seeing corruption that in him the ever-living seed of David may reigne to the end of this world and that in some peculiar way priviledge and relation and proportion to David or else the dint and vigor of Isaiahs and the Psalmists Text and the Apostles Commentary is made to languish Which priviledge peculiarity relation and analogy to David what can it bee but a visible Reigning or Kingdome of Christ For Christs Kingdom purely spirituall by his Word and Spirit what doth it more relate to David then to other Christian Kings and Princes of the Gentiles converted from Heathenisme or how more over Davids people or Kingdome more then over all Indians and Heathens where the Gospel is spread and received ¶ 2 Again that in verse the tenth of this eleventh of Isaiah There shall be a root of Jesse which shall stand for an ensign of the people to it shall the GENTILES seek the Apostle Rom. 15.12 draws down to Christ then ascended and gives us this sense of the Prophet That Christ is not onely the OBJECT of faith to the Gentiles but that the Gentiles shall be his SUBJECTS he reigning over them How reigning over them Marke curiously the Apostles words and you may perceive something Againe saith the Apostle There shall be a root of Iesse and he that shall RISE to REIGNE over the Gentiles in him shall the Gentiles trust His reigning as in relation to David doth not commence from his Incarnation but he shall RISE to reigne spoken by the Apostle after Christs Resurrection and Ascention and rendred as you heare by our Translators under a future notion He shall rise to reigne Yea follow the words yet closer even home to the very doores of the Original and you will see I thinke yet more ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. There shall be a root of Iesse and he shall RISE AGAINE to reigne over the Gentiles or stand up AGAINE to reigne over them Christ had before the Apostle penned that risen the first time viz. from the grave of the earth But now that he hath ascended long since up into heaven and there as it
it Isa 26. the same things John applies to the fall of Antichrist and the ruine of his nest viz. the City where he rests Rev. 16.19 we have it once The City of Nations fell and great Babylon came in remembrance before God But in Revel 18. we have it three times viz. v. 2. v. 10. v. 18. SECT XVII UPon the seventh place in Isa viz. Isa 33. v. 20 21. I will onely aske this question of all the men and books in the world When was that ever fulfilled since Isaiahs time which is here spoken viz. Thine eyes shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation a Tabernacle that shall be taken down not ONE of the stakes thereof shal EVER be removed neither shall ANY cord thereof be broken But there the Lord will be to us a place of broad rivers and streams wherein shall go no Gally with Oars nor gallant ship passe by I say when since Isaiahs Prophesie was this fulfilled For about seventy yeers after his begining to prophesie Jerusalem was taken by the King of Babylon and the King and Nobles carried away captive into Babylon And whereas they returned againe about the yeer five hundred thirty six afore Christ and enjoyed their Country a good space of time yet about one hundred sixty seven yeers afore Christ Antiochus Epiphanes being ejected out of Egypt by the Romans invades Jerusalem with a great Army and spoyles and wastes both City and Temple About threescore and eleven yeers after Christs birth the Temple was destroyed by Titus the Roman About threescore and one yeer after that viz. a hundred thirty and one after Christ the City was destroyed by Adrian the Roman Emperour After these the Saracens and Turks invade Jerusalem and Judea possessing it to this day SECT XVIII § 1 THe eighth place in Isaiah is Chap. 34. v. 1. to v. 18. wee shall need but touch upon some passages of so plaine a place as this Vers 1 2 c. Come neer ye Nations to hear and hearken ye people let the EARTH hear and ALL that is therein the WORLD and ALL things that come sorth of it observe this Prophesie concerns the whole Universe for the indignation of the Lord is upon ALL Nations and his fury upon ALL their Armies he hath utterly destroyed them he hath delivered them to the slaughter with many more illustrations and all for the sake of Zion to be avenged of Zions enemies v. 8. But there was nothing of this done at the Jewes return from Babylon carried captive thither about seventy yeers after this was spoken And at Christs Incarnation they were under the Romans power And to this day under the Turks who next succeeded the Romans in dominering over them Therefore St. John carries this down to the New Testament and the later times thereof unto the ruine of the Antichristian Nations that are incorrigible enemies of Christ whereby to make way for the glorious Restitution of which wee treat Rev. 11. There was a great Earthquake and the tenth part of the City fell and there were slain of men seven thousand a number of perfection to signifie a sufficient number for the designe were taken off The Lord takes to him his great power and destroyes them that destroy the earth Rev. 19. One sate upon a white horse called faithfull and true his eyes were as a flame of fire c. and out of his mouth went a sharp sword that with it he might smite the NATIONS and rule them with a rod of IRON And an Angel cryed with a loud voice saying to the foules c. Come and gather your selves together c. that yee may eat the flesh of Kings and of Captains and of mighty men and of horses and of them that sit on them and the flesh of ALL men both free and bond both small and great c. § 2 Againe vers 8 9 10. of this 34. Isa it is prophesied It is the day of the Lords vengeance and the yeer of recompences for the controversie of Zion And the streams thereof shall be turned into pitch and the dust thereof into brimstone and the land thereof shall become a burning pitch and it shall not be quenched night nor day THE SMOAK thereof shall go up FOR EVER Now as there was none of this acted at the returne of the Jewes from Babylon or at Christs Incarnation or since but that still Antichrist both Easterne and Westerne dominere over most of the world So Saint John in the Revelation not onely in my judgement but in the judgement of the old Geneva Notes and of our New Annotationists too carries down these Prophesies of the destruction of the Antichristian world Rev. 14.11 Rev. 18.18 and Rev. 19.3 where it is said And the smoake of their torment ascended up for ever and they have no rest day nor night who worship the Beast and his Image and whosoever receiveth the mark of his name And they saw the smoak of the burning of Babylon and her smoak went up for ever and ever § 3 Again it is prophesied in the 11. âerse of the 34. of Isa that in and upon the desolations of the enemies of the Church shall dwell the Cormorant Bittern and the Owle and Raven which being never fulfilled to the effect of Isaiahs Prophesie unto St. Johns time hee carries it downe as our New Annotationists consent with me unto the desolations yet to be made upon Antichrist Rev. 18.2 An Angel cryed mightily with a strong voice saying Babylon the great is fallen is fallen is become the habitation of Devils and the hold of every foule spirit and a cage of every unclean and hatefull bird § 4 And which is very considerable the Hebrew Rabbins and Chaldee Paraphrase interpret these judgements denounced in this chapter of the ruine of Rome Chal. v. 9. c. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã i. e. The streams of Rome shall be turned into pitch and its dust into brimstone and its land into burning pitch So the Chaldee which Kimchy cites and approves R. Kimchi also on verse 16. hath ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã The ruine of Rome With which passages the Roman Clergy being offended leave out in their Editions of those Authors the ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Rome and put in ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã i. e. Cuthith and Javan that is Grecia § 5 And as all these things have not been hitherto fulfilled so they cannot be imagined to be fulfilled at the ultimate judgement at which time one place will be no more desolate then another no birds inhabiting desolations c. Therefore they must bee fulfilled in a time between this Age and the ultimate judgement § 6 If it be objected that the threats of this Chapter are directed against Idumea the Country of Edom or Esau and Bozra the Metropolis thereof v. 6. It is easily answered that though Idumea bee named in particular as a most intestine Jew-hating enemy as the manner of unreconciled kindred is and to be destroyed among the rest
by David mentioned Isai 55. and Psal 16. is signified Christ Nor shall David return again till the Physical Corporal Resurrection of the Saints before which must precede the Metaphorical Resurrection that is the call of the Jews at least five and forty years afore as we have before proved upon Daniel chap. 12. So this returning of Israel here meant is not onely from captivity but from sin as is plain by that which follows They shall fear the Lord and his goodness Fear here as commonly throughout the Scriptures being put for all the inward graces and worship of God in the heart as to trust in him rejoyce in him love him c. and that for his goodness that is in through and for Christ who as he is called the wisdom of God 1 Cor. 1. And the Word of God Joh. 1. c. so he is the Goodness of God because God is not cannot in justice be communicative of his goodness unto the lapsed sons of Adam but in and through Christ Tit. 3.4 5 6. § 6 Which things being so they speak of themselves that they were never yet fulfilled according to the purport of the Text. For the generality of Israel and Judah too are to this day without a King without a Prince without a Priest without a Sacrifice that ceasing at least ever since three hundred sixty and six Nor have they instead of those Princes Priests and Sacrifices sought the Lord their God and David that is Christ their King to fear the Lord and his goodness as hath been afore expounded And for the last day of Judgement that is no time for Conversions of souls and reversions from captivity Therefore this prophesie in the main of it is yet to be fulfilled Thus of Hosea SECT XL. NExt we come to the Prophet Joel The first place in him is Chap. 2. v. 28 29 30 31 32 33. Verse 28. And it shall come to pass afterwards that I will pour out my spirit upon ALL FLESH and your sons and your daughters shall prophesie your old men shall dream dreams your young men shall see visions Verse 29. And also upon the servants and upon the handmaids in those days will I pour out my Spirit Verse 30. And I will shew wonders in Heaven and in Earth Blood and Fire and Pillars of smoak Verse 31. The Sun shall be turned into darkness and the Moon into blood before that great and terrible day of the Lord come Verse 32. And it shall come to pass that whosoever shall call upon the name of the Lord shall be delivered For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance as the Lord hath said and in the REMNANT WHOM THE LORD SHALL CALL § 1 Note first in general touching the ALL of this Text that though Saint Peter in Acts 2. doth truly apply part thereof to the wonderful effusion of the Spirit there yet is it not solely applicable to that nor is the intent and meaning of the whole or of any part thereof wholly fulfilled and terminated therein And that I may not be condemned of singularity herein let me tell you what others hint to the same effect though they will not speak out to my size That antient pious and most learned Oecolampadius Publick Reader of Divinity at Basil above an hundred years since saith upon Verse 28. ET ERIT ubi illa impleri coeperint ubi Christ us nimirum sanguine suo faedus nostrum confirmaverit ubi a mortu is resurrexerit i. e. The things onely BEGAN to be fulfilled presently after the resurrection of Christ c. And that learned and ingenuous Alapide upon the same Verse POST HAEC i. e. Post Christum doctorem ejusque mortem ascensum in coelum ego Deus effundam Spiritum Sanctum in Pentecoste ac DEINCEPS primo ecclesiae seculo visibiliter in Apostolos Christi discipulos SEQUENTIBUS vero SECULIS invisibiliter cundem effundam in OMNES c. That is God did promise to pour out his Spirit after the Ascension of Christ in the dayes of Pentecost and so afterwards on the first age of the Church visibly in the succeeding ages invisibly upon all So that both these confess upon this first clause That this effusion of the Spirit prophesied by our Prophet was not fully fulfilled in Acts 2. where the Apostles quotes it And for those other passages in Verse 30 c. I will shew wonders in Heaven and on Earth Calvin confesseth Prophetam comprehendere totum Christi Regnum ab initio usque ad finem c. That is The Prophet here comprehends the whole Kingdom of Christ from the beginning to the end thereof And this is usual enough And in other places of Scripture we have shewed that the Prophets commonly so speak or so speak in common When therefore they speak of the Kingdom of Christ sometimes they touch upon the beginning thereof sometimes also they speak of the end thereof But often within one graspe or comprehension they design the whole course race or process of Christs Kingdom from first to last And so the Prophet doth here Thus Calvin with much more to that purpose Alapide likewise on this thirtieth and one and thirtieth Verse deals very plainly and ingenuously with the Text and with us opposing those of his own Religion The Catholicks saith he think that these prodigious signs came to pass 1. At the Nativity of Christ when the star appeared to the wisemen and the Angels appeared to the Shepherds 2. At Christs passion when the Sun was eclipsed the Earth trembled the graves opened the beholders astonished 3. At Christs Resurrection in the appearance of the Angel astonishing the Soldier that kept the Sepulchre and comforted Mary Magdalen and her company 4. At the Pentecost in the cloven tongues of fire at which time the Spirit was poured out This Exposition saith Alapide is probable but incompleat Then indeed began these wonders but shall be compleated a little afore the day of Judgement as I shall declare by and by On the otherside Saint Jerom and Oecumenius saith Alapide hold That these prodigies were acted a little afore the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus But lastly and genuinly it is certain That here are handled the prodigious prognosticks that shall precede the day of judgement which appears from the beginning of the next Chapter Thus Alapide Adde one more Lyra saith Doctor Mayer averts that in this thirtieth Verse The Prophet passeth from the first coming of Christ to his second before which these signs shall be shewed Thus you see I am not singularly bold to assert that this Scripture was not totally and finally fulfilled in that story Acts 2. And Peter himself tacitly intimates as much in translating the Prophets ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã afterward by ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã In the last days which must not exclude One thousand six hundred and twenty years succeeding reckoning from Christs Ascension but to our time And our Prophet drops some passages which
to this day falls far shorter of the fulnesse of the Gentiles coming in and therefore shorter yet of the Saving all Israel as the Apostles phrases are Rom. 11 We have it from day to day before our eies that not one of ten Christians hardly is more then called a Christian and not one Jew of ten thousand bears the name of a Christian And therefore in this first branch this place of Ioel is not in the main yet fulfilled 2. This of this second of Ioel is not yet fulfilled That at the time the Prophet mainly means there must be such wonders in Heaven and in Earth as must be accompanied with blood and fire and pillars of smoake and such a darkning of the Sun and discolouring of the Moon c. As all these things must amount to the making up of a GREAT and TERRIBLE DAY OF THE LORD And that in relation to the destruction of them that believe not so as to call upon God in faith as the last verse intimateth Whosoever shall call upon the Name of the Lord shall be saved And the destruction shall be especially of those unbelievers that are enemies to the Jews as the same last verse of this second Chapter and the first and second verses of the third Chapter do evidently hint For in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance as the Lord hath said and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For behold in THOSE DAYES and in THAT TIME when I shall bring again the captivity of JUDAH and JERUSALEM I will also gather ALL NATIONS and will bring them down to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will PLEAD with them there for my people and for my heritage ISRAEL whom they have scattered For by the wonders at the passion of Christ Matth. 27. there was no destruction of any man At the effusion of the Spirit after his ascension Acts 2. There was nothing but consolation or at least admiration At the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus according to Matth. 24. there was the sad destruction of the Jews but of none of the Jews enemies 3. This of this prophesie of Joel is not yet fully fulfilled viz. In Mount Zion and in Jerusalem shall be deliverance AS THE LORD HATH SAID and in the remnant whom the Lord shall call For this was not compleated in the few Jews converted in the Acts or since as these Reasons induce me to think 1. The Apostle Peter in Acts the second quoting Joel makes not the least mention of this clause 2. Christs coming to Jerusalem as a Spiritual Deliverer in his publick ministration of the Gospel was before that of pouring out of the Spirit about five years as his disputing with the Doctors was two and twenty years before and his incarnation above four and thirty years afore But the deliverance mentioned according to the Apostles method yea and of the Prophets is after the pouring out of the Spirit And indeed follows after as naturally as the effect succeeds the cause This pouring out of the Spirit fitting instruments for the salvation of those ages 3. The Prophet addes as the Lord hath said viz. By his Prophets But they mainly spake of the Jews corporal deliverance as we have before opened in the discuss of many places For as for spiritual they then had it and there was no doubt but it should be continued in all ages else the Church would be extinct or Gods Covenant with Abraham and David would fail 4. The Deliverance must be not onely in Jerusalem but in the remnant whom the Lord shall call But Christ did not at his being on Earth save the generality of the remnant either corporally or spiritually The Two Tribes were then under the Roman captivity and they generally refused Christ John 1.11 Acts 13.46 47. and for the Ten Tribes they for the generality neither saw nor heard Christ but continued in their captivity in Assyria c. 1 Pet. 1.1 Jam. 1.1 They were not returned to Zion or Jerusalem and for the Gentiles if any will make them of the remnant which is hatsh being the greater part of the world they and the Jews were never yet incorporated in Religion as the copulative And promiseth viz. There shall be deliverance in those days and at that time in Jerusalem AND in the remnant whom the Lord shall call 5. The Prophet Joel speaks of such a deliverance of the Jews as shall be by bringing down their enemies to the valley of destruction to them though of salvation to the Jews as the next Chapter vers 1 2 c. shews But this hath not been yet fulfilled as was touched afore neither can it be fulfilled at the last judgement For that being once come there is no effectual salvation or invocation as the last verse of the second Chapter mentions SECT XLI THe second and last place we shall touch in this Prophet Joel is Chap. 3. v. 1 c. to the end of the Chapter For behold in § 1 those days and in that time when I shall bring again the captivity of Judah and Jerusalem 2. I will also gather all Nations and will bring them down into the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people and for my heritage Israel whom they have scattered among the Nations and parted my Land 3. And they have cast lots for my people and have given a Boy for a Harlot and sold a Girle for Wine that they might drink 4. Yea and what have ye to do with me O Tyre and Zidon and all the coasts of Palestine will ye render me a recompence and if ye recompence me swiftly and speedily will I return your recompence upon your own head 5. Because ye have taken my silver and my gold and have carried into your Temples my goodly pleasant things 6. The children also of Judah and the children of Jerusalem have ye sold unto the Grecians that ye might remove them far from their border 7. Behold I will raise them âut of the place whither ye have sold them and will return your recompence upon your own head 8. And I will sell your sons and your daughters into the hand of the children of Judah and they shall sell them to the Sabeans to a people far off for the Lord hath spoken it 9. Proclaim ye this among the Gentiles prepare war wake up the mighty men let all the men of war draw near let them come up 10. Beat your plough-shares into swords and your pruning-hooks into spears let the weak say I am strong 11. Assemble your selves and come all ye heathen and gather your selves together round about Thither cause thy mighty ones to come down O Lord. 12. Let the Heathen be wakened and come up to the valley of Jehoshaphat for there will I sit to judge all the Heathen round about 13. Put ye in the sickle for the harvest is ripe Come get you down for the oress is full the fats overflow for the wickedness is great
14. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision 15. The Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining 16. The Lord shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake but the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of Israel 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be holy and here shall no stranger pass thorough her any more 18. And it shall come âo pass in that day that the mountains shall drop down new wine and the hills shall flow with milk and all the rivers of Judah shall flow with waters and a fountain shall come forth of the house of the Lord and shall water the valley of Shittim 19. Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness for the violence against the children of Judah because they have shed innocent blood in their Land 20. But Judah shall dwell for ever and Jerusalem from generation to generation 21. For I will cleanse their blood that I have not cleansed for the Lord dwelleth in Zion This as it follows close at the heels of the former place so notwithstanding mens chapter-divisions hath it a great coherence with it Calvin upon this third Chapter verse 1 2. tell us in the general Confirmat his verb is Propheta quod prius docuit de Ecclesiae RESTITUTIONE i. e. The Prophet in these words confirms what before he had taught concerning the RESTITUTION of the Church More particularly let me tell you That the most if not the all of the former place in the second Chapter is again mentioned in this third Chapter and with four great emphases of connexion both sounding of confirmation and explanation of what had been said before 1. FOR Hebrew ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Chalde ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Septuagint ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã As if the Lord should say I bring this for a proof that I will do as I have said 2. BEHOLD Hebrew ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Chalde ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Septuagint ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã As much as to say There shall be some notable thing done some grand event as an eminent sign that I will be as good as my word 3. IN THOSE DAYES and AT THAT TIME with great emphasis of Pronouns and Articles both in Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint Hebrew ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Chalde ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Septuagint ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã which sound to this effect That methodically and in a just order when I do the former things I will do these following also so that the plurality and magnificence of exploits shall force the eyes of men to see my truth and true performance of all that I have spoken 4. I will in pursuance of that deliverance of my people mentioned in the former Chapter Gather all Nations to the valley of Jehoshaphat and will plead with them there for my people which amounts justly to thus much for our present observation That the famous remarkable circumstances as before of time so here of place shall be undeniable witnesses of the substance of my true performance For as the great Philosopher saith Many common accidents concurring may amount to a proprium quarto modo to an infallible property and so to a demonstration And we know that circumstances of time and place c. beget in us great credence to a report That such a thing was done Thus for the coherence of this place with the former § 2 Next for the substance of this place in order to our point take notice in the entrance That the people that shall according to this prophesie be delivered are named in the first verse Judah and the Inhabitants of Jerusalem signifying the Two Tribes In the second verse and verse sixteen they are called his heritage Israel and the scattered among all Nations which most aptly set forth the Ten Tribes who of the Kingdome of Israel became the greatest dispersion among all Nations far beyond those of Iudah And the deliverance of both is so expressed in the Hebrew Chalde and Septuagint that the words may well be extended to a spiritual conversion of their souls from infidelity beside the corporal deliverance of their persons from captivity as many Translaters render it And for confirmation observe That whereas in Hosea chap. 1. the Lord calls them speaking of both the said Kingdoms of the Iews Lo-ammi NOT MY PEOPLE and Lo-ruhamah I WILL NOT HAVE MERCY viz. Whiles they are to be in captivity where for the general they lost their piety as well as their liberty in not receiving Christ and his Gospel from thence to this day Behold here in this Text of Joel the Lord speaking of their deliverance expresseth it in relation and to the effect of receiving them at their return as his people and to be his heritage v. 2. For surely if God did justly for their great wickedness carry them away captive he had little reason to receive them from thence if they were no better then when they went Put now all together and all plainly spells that this first clause of the deliverance of Judah and Israel hath not been fulfilled to this day according to the sence before demonstrated which will clearly appear by the rest that follows § 3 For in the next place we are to observe that this must not bee a meer still and tacit deliverance of the Jewes but withall a tumultuous destruction of their Enemies that formerly caused their bondage and with-held their deliverance ver 2. I will gather all Nations and being them down into the Valley of Jehosaphat and plead with them there or my people c. Which last clause the Chalde renders ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. And I will take vengeance on them there for my people which is much further amplified in ver 9 10 11 12. c. The valley of Jehosaphat is particularly named here as the place where God will avenge his people 1. Because there Jehosaphat overthrew the Ammonites and Moabites and their Confederates that rose up against the Jewes 2 Chron. 20.22 c. 2. Jehosaphat signifies pleading or judging viz. the thing that God will doe upon the incorrigible enemies that yet remaine ver 12. 3. Because this is also called the valley of Beracha that is the valley of blessing Because there Jehosaphat blessed and praised God first in hope of the said Victory Secondly for helpe in the said Victory 2 Chron. 20.22 compare ver 16. 4. Because this is called the valley of decision or threshing twice in this fourteenth verse of this third of Joel because there God threshed his Enemies as the chaffe from the wheat according to Isai 25.10 and thereby decided the controversie between the Jewes and their Enemies viz. that the Jewes should
corner And the line shall go forth over against it upon the hill Gareb c. Thus the Rabbins to this question by which it is apparent they expect a glorious state on earth at the resurrection Fourthly he gives this as the last reason of the resurrection the rest being not so pat to our purpose Ibid. l. 2. c. 10. p. 186 187 c. I mention not Because saith he if they onely that shall be alive at the time the rest should rise shall enjoy the salvation and deliverance of the Lord and the FELICITY OF THE DAYES OF THE MESSIA then many should be most unjustly dealt with viz. they that have suffered much and that unto death for godlinesse sake c. This reason is as alleadged by R. Menasse so asserted by R. Arisba in his Commentaries called Agadot and assented unto by R. Isaac Abravanel This reason is good but because not pertinently driven home to my purpose as touching making Saints to triumph where they have been trampled I quoted it I confesse rather for the sake of a By-expression as more direct to my Thesis viz. That the Saints at the Resurrection shall enjoy the felicity of the dayes of the Messia which dayes unlesse they be fulfilled on earth afore the ultimate universall judgement I know not how they should in the ultimate glory when Christ shall lay down all Kingdome and power and God must be all in all 1 Cor. 15.24.28 § 3 The third Book presents us with the full minde of the stream of learned Rabbins viz. with the whole state of the world to come immediately following the Resurrection ¶ 1 In the first Chapter are presented to us three several opinions of the Rabbins touching the meaning of the phrase oft in Scripture the world to come Some understanding the world of separated souls others that world that shall follow a certaine terme of time after the time of the Resurrection Others that World that begins at the very hour of the Resurrection Which third opinion saith learned R. Manasse is to me most probable Of this opinion was R. Moses Gerundensis in a contest against R. Moses Egyptius who held the first of the three opinions aforesaid And Gerundensis opinion in sum was this That the world to come is that which immediately follows the resurrection of the dead into which all that live piously probously and honestly being raised shall be brought in soule and body conjoyned to enjoy indefinentlie and without end the reward of their labours With this compare the prayer which the men of the Great Synagogue composed whose words are these ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. That is There is no proportion with thee O Lord our God in this world There is none besides thee O our King in the world to come none besides thee O our Redeemer in the daies of the Messiah and who is like to thee in the resurrection of the dead Which words thus rendred close to the Hebrew without âaking liberty of neoterick phrase may conveniently bee thus explained That in opposition to this life in its mighty length throughout all ages first named they put the World to come of the Eternal state set in the second place And lastly they name the daies of the Messiah at the resurrection of the dead as intercident between both For plainly they here speak in the two last of a World to come ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã as they speak and that with an emphasis And therefore the dayes of the resurrection of the dead and of the Messiah at this coming are according to their sense all one With this well concurs that in the Sanhedrim That no man of those that deny the resurrection shall partake of the world to come giving this reason ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. i.e. Who ever denieth the resurrections of the dead by this very thing there cannot redound to him a share in the resurrection from the dead Consonantly R. Abraham Bibag in his book called Derech * Emuna l. 3. part 4. proves by severall places of Scripture that The houre of the resurrection of the dead and the continued and perpetuall life which shall follow is called the world to come For although oftentimes the same name is given to the world of separated soules yet properly and more rightly is understood the world of the resurrection of the dead I insist not upon the application of these to our purpose being I have hinted sufficient afore in this Section and we shall anon hear the Rabbins come nearer to us and carry the matter up to the very achme and top of their prospect of light ¶ 2 In the next the second Chapter of the said third Book the Rabbins speak out plainly and freely what before we struggled for by deduction whiles their speeches were darker It shall not bee grievous to us as much haste as we are in to translate much of this Chapter and those that follow of the said third book out of the Latine and Hebrew whiles the things much conduce to the truth in hand because the Book it selfe is not to be had The head or summe of this second Chapter is That the RESURRECTION OF THE DEAD shall be conjoyned unto the DAYES of the MESSIAH This R. Menasse Ben Israel 1 Learnedly proves out of the books of Moses and the Prophets And secondly brings the stream of learned ancient Rabbins consenting thereunto It is apparent saith he out of Moses by that song of his Deut. 32. v. 35 36. to v. 40. To me belongeth vengeance c. their foot shall slide in due time For the Lord shall JUDGE his people and repent himself for his servants when he seeth that their power is gone c. See now that I even I am he and there is no God with me I kill and I make alive See here saith Menasse the day of the comming of the Messiah and the day of the resurrection are conjoyned As for the Prophets it is manifest saith he out of the second Chapter of Isaiah It shall come to passe in the last of dayes that the mountaine of the Lords house shall be established in the top of the Mountains c. and all Nations shall flow unto it And many people shal say Come let us go up to the Mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Jacob and he will teach us his wayes and we will walk in his paths for out of Zion shal go forth the Law and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem and he shal judge among the Nations c. and they shal beat their swords into plow-shares The Prophet here teacheth saith R. Menasse not onely temporal good things but also spiritual which shall come to passe when the Messiah shall come For then all Nations with unanimous consent even as Zephany also foretels adhering to the God of Isaac and Jacob and imbracing his Doctrine shall serve him with one kinde of worship Then all shall enjoy a quiet
spirit shall be removed farre away from the Church Zach. 13 2. Thirdly For the rest of the dayes works of Creation as in them were created the dry-land the Plants the Fishes and Fowls and Animals c. So in this New creation there shall be a perfection of all those then in being for of a resurrection of irrationals I know nothing and they shall be freed and set at liberty from all danger and hardship Isa 11.6 7 8 9. Rom. 8.19 20 21 22. I speak now short to these things because I am not yet come to the qualifications of this future glorious estate into which this Head would sometimes faine draw me but I will not be anticipated ¶ 4 This future glorious estate on earth is a creation in regard of the end viz. that as man was created last of all most perfect in soule and body as the subordinate end next under God for which God made it viz. that man might have the possession and use of all and dominion over all Gen. 1.26 So in this New creation Christ restores all things to their perfection and every beleever to his to that end that all beleevers being raised or changed as afore described may joyntly and co-ordinately rule over the whole world and all things therein next under Christ their Head I say All and not apart onely as some unwarily publish And I say joyntly not one part of the Saints to usurp authority over the rest as many dream And co-ordinately All upon equall tearms not some Saints to rule by Deputies made of the rest of the Saints as the practise of men seem to interpret And all to be true Saints not seeming Thus we read in Dan. 7. verse 14. and 27. And Rev. 20.4 And Chap. 21. verse 24.26 Study the places well and you will easily picke it out CHAP. III. Measuring out the DIMENSIONS of this glorious estate to be on Earth afore the ultimate universal Judgement § 1 HAving done with the Creation of it we come next to the Dimensions Quantity or Extent of the glorious Kingdome of Christ on Earth yet expected viz. That as the other foure Monarchies did over spread all the inhabited world as it is said of Nebuchadnezzars Assyrto-Chaldean Monarchy Dan. 2.37 that he was King of Kings and that WHERESOEVER THE CHILDREN OF MEN DWEâT the Beasts of the field and fowles of the Heaven GOD HAD GIVEN INTO HIS HAND and had made him RULER OVER ALL and of Caesars Roman Monarchy Luke 2.1 That there went out a decree from him that ALL THE WORLD should bee taxed So this fifth Monarchy of the Saints reigning on earth under Christ must be as large as those Monarchies as large as the whole world for ample Dominion though not for sincere conversion That is the generality of men in the time of this Kingdome being converted into true Saints they shall rule over all the whole world of men swallowing up the other former Monarchies So that if there be remaining a secret seed of hypocrisie in âome which shall at last God so foretelling Rev. 20.8 breake out in the Gogican War at the end of our THOUSAND yeers shall yet mean while all men all the time of the thousand yeers shall be demurely subject to the Dominion of the Saints Touching the latitude and largenesse of this Holy-Kingdome read Dan. 2.34 35. The stone cut out without hands smote the Image on his feet that were of iron and of clay and brake them to peeces Then was the iron the clay the brasse the silver and the gold broken in peeces together and became like the chasse of the Summerthershing floore and the wind carried them away so that NO PLACE WAS FOUND FOR THEM and the stone that smote the Image became a great Mountaine and FILLED THE WHOLE EARTH Dan. 7.26 27 And the judgement shall sit and they shall take away his the preceding Monarchies Dominion c. And the Kingdome and Dominion and the greatnesse of the Kingdome UNDER THE WHOLE HEAVEN shall be given to the people of the Saints c. And Rev. 10.7 St. John having said In the dayes of the voyce of the seventh Angel when he shall BEGIN to sound the mystery of God shall be finished he goes on in the 11. Chapter verse 15. saying The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voyces in Heaven saying The KINGDOMES of this WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our Lord and of his Christ and he shall reigne for ever That is no Monarchy shall ever be on earth after his Adde Isa 2. In the second verse c. whereof yee have the propagation of the Gospel of Christs Kingdome and mens obedience to it In the 11 verse repeated againe verse 17. yee have the Lord Christ exalted and his overthrowing all worldly powers prostrate before him in these words The lofty lookes of man shall be humbled and the haughtinesse of men shall be bowed downe and the LORD ALONE shall be exalted Which words though covertly for feare of provoking worldly Monarchs are alleadged by the Jewes to the same end as you have heard afore at large To the same effect of the largenesse of Christs Kingdome is that notable place in Isa 24. verse 21 22 23. In that day it shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the Host of the high ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth UPON EARTH and they shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison and after many dayes they shall be visited Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sunne ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall REIGNE IN MOUNT SION and in Jerusalem before his Ancients gloriously His Ancients are his ancient people the Jews And as the material Sunne and Moon shall be then nothing in comparison of the light of Gods presence as afore-shewed so the metaphorical Sunne and Moon for the same Scripture may have two subordinate senses Rev. 17.9 10. I say the metaphorical Sunne and Moon of higher and lower humane Majesties shall be confounded with shame So Jacob a Prince in those times and his wife are called by the name and interpreted to be the meaning of that name of the Sunne and Moon in Josephs dream Gen. 37.9 even as we had but now in that 24 of Isa both name and thing metaphor meaning expressed And by the same rule and proportion we may admit of others annexing a metaphorical sense to that Revelation 21. verse 23 24. that in Christs Kingdome to come upon earth there shall be no need of the Sunne or Moon i. e. of Emperial Royal or Princely Potentates to keep the peace as we have expounded it also in a litteral sense of the obscuring of the glory of all the Stars by the paramount glory of Gods presence For God and the Lambs presence shall be in stead of and more then the Sunne and Moon in both senses One both learned and godly doth likewise to the
to the Church Which is added to this All-New condition Rev. 21.4 As there shal be no place so no more time for any sorrowful or sorrow-making things or persons or mutable matters Christ will not allow them an houre nor a minute in the Church Dives had his time Their glasse is run Christs houre is come The Sonne of righteousnesse ariseth the dark must be gone ¶ 5 This imports that the happinesse of Saints shall not be given them by measure of time Tempus est numerus motus Time is measured motion Saints shall not be happy so long and no longer This thousand yeers is the prelude to everlasting infinite glory Saints shall not need to wish saying This is a happy condition if it would hold So that as miseries shall not have the least time allowed them on earth so the Saints mercies shall not be measured out to continue onely so long and no longer The thousand yeers are the preface and then Magog stirring at last gives Christ occasion to give them the Saints everlasting infinit injoyment So that in the glorious state of the Church shall be no measuring it out by time as so long to continue and no longer It shall be a thousand yeers happy on earth But then it is not said shall be an end But this is swallowed up of a greater Of this stability of things at this time see further in Isa 33.6 spoken in relation to the call of Jewes c. wisdome and knowledge shall be the stability of times and strength of salvation and the feare of the Lord thy treasure As grace shall not period with time And God cannot period with time so nor the Churches condition Isa 60.19 The Sunne shall be no more thy light by day nor the Moon thy brightnesse by night but the Lord shall be thy EVERLASTING LIGHT and thy God thy glory which applied to Church state in the seventh Trumpet Rev. 21.23 It followes Isa 60.20 Thy Sunne shall no more goe downe neither shall thy Moon withdraw it selfe for the Lord shall be thy everlasting light and the dayes of thy mourning shall be at an end Rather then the Sun and Moon shall play fast and loose with the Church they shall not Move There shall bee no more Sun set or change of the Moon No measuring out Saints happinesse by times SECT VIII The next Quality is That at this time there shall be a perfection of all qualities both natural and spiritual in the Saints § 1 AS before we said No measuring by fading time so now we affirm no stinting to an infirme degree Now there shall bee no lower degree then a freedome from all imperfection Zach. 12.8 It s spoken of this time see verse 12. viz. When the Jews shall see Christ and mourne and repent and bee filled with grace Then verse 8. Hee that is feeble shall be as David And the house of David as God better rendred as Angels The Hebrew is Kelohim Elohim oft signifying Angels and here is an Incrementum so that the last must be highest then it follows as the Angel of God Hebrew is emphatical Hamaleak the name of Christ Malach. 3. The sense then is They shall be as Christs how strong the feeble shall be viz. as strong firm and sublime in perfection as David And how shall David be As an Angel Yea as Christ Sutable to 1 Cor. 15. We shall be conformable to Christ And Phil. 3.21 Our bodies like his glorious body And 1 Cor. 13.12 Know as we are knowne our graces shall be as Rivers in the Ocean Isa 11.9 So that as our perfection cannot period so nor last by vicissitudes as now sometimes up sometimes sinke but shall be still at full height SECT IX A Confluence of all Comforts in the injoyers and injoyed § 1 AS it is said 1 Pet. 1. who in 2 Epist 3. Chapter speaks of this glorious time I say as it is said 1 Pet. 1. verse 3 4 5. He hath begotten us againe to a lively hope by the Resurrection of Jesus Christ to an inheritance incorruptible RESERVED IN HEAVEN for you who are kept by the power of God ready to be REVEALED in the LAST TIME so now in this Heaven as it is called Rev. 21. the inheritance is kept perfect to us and us in it Of this see all the 35. Chapter of Isa Wee did before demonstrate that that Isa 34. relates to this time we speake of And this 35. Chapter is but a part of the same discourse As the forme viz. the 34. Chapter is of the ruine of the Churches enemies and the delivery of the Church so this 35. Chapter is a description what the Church shall injoy Viz. verse 1. The solitary places shall be glad for them and the Desart shall rejoyce and blossome like a rose Verse 2. The glory of Lebanon shall be given to it The excellency of Carmel and Sharon shall see the glory of the Lord. Verse 3. Strengthen ye the weake hands and confirme the feeble knees Verse 4. Say unto them that are of a fearful heart be strong feare not behold your God will come with vengeance he will come and save you Verse 5. The eyes of the blinde shall be opened and the deafe eares unstopped Verse 6. Then shall the lame man leap as an Hart and the tongue of the dumb sing for in the wildernesse shall waters break out and streams in the desart Verse 7. The parched ground shall become a poole and the thirsty land springs of waters In the habitation of Dragons shall bee grasse and rushes Verse 8. An high-way there shall be and it shall bee called the way of holinesse the unclean shall not passe over it Fools shall not erre therein Verse 9. No Lion shall be there nor ravenous beast shall goe up thereon but the redeemed shall walk there Verse 10. And the ransomed of the Lord shall returne and come to Zion with songs and everlasting joy upon their heads they shall obtaine joy and gladnesse and sorrow and sighing shall flye away Yee see how all happinesse is upon the possession and the Possessor The possession shall not bee defective and unserviceable and the Possessour shall not by any impediment bee hindered of his injoyment All the Injoyers and Injoyments shall be varnished with beauty environed with peace enlarged with liberty perpetuated with stable equability ¶ 1 Varnished with beauty As Homer saith of the Golden Sea because of the beams of the Sun raditing upon it so the Church and all the Churches injoyments shall be guilded with beams guilded with beams of Christs glorious presence At this time Christ shall arise as the Sunne Malach. 4. as wee have shewed compared with 2 Pet. 1.19 And because he ariseth and shines on the Church therefore the Church shall arise and shine as the Sunne rising in the East looks on the Moon and makes it at the full in the West Isa 60.1 2. Arise shine for thy light is come and the glory of the Lord
Position Sect. 1 Of the Saints living that thousand yeers Sect. 2 Of their reigning that 1000 years Sect. 3 Or their reigning with Christ Sect. 4 Of the thousand yeers BOOK II. 1 Chap. The general Position taken asunder into two parts 1 How Christ shall be with his Saints 2 How the Saints shall reign under him 2 Chap. Ten several Scriptures out of the New-Testament in relation to the first part to prove the visible appearance of Christ personally to the Church on earth at the time of her Restauration alleadged and explained Sect. 1. Joh. 19.37 They shall look on him whom they have pierced collated with that in Zach. 12 10. c. whence it is quoted Sect. 2. Rev. 1.7 Behold he commeth with clouds and every eye shall see him c. Sect. 3. Matth. 24.30 And then shall appear the signe of the Son of man in heaven c. Sect. 4. The 2 Thess 2.1 c. Now I beseech you brethren by the comming of our Lord Jesus Christ c. Sect. 5. Mat. 26.29 I will not drinke henceforth of this fruit of the vine untill that day when I drinke it new with you in my Fathers Kingdome Sect. 6. The 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus c. Sect. 7. Act. 3.19 20 21. Repent yee therefore and be converted that c. Sect. 8. Mat. 23.38 Your house is left unto you desolate c. Sect. 9. Mat. 24. When shall these things be c. Sect. 10. Luke 19.11 to 28. He added and spake a Parable c. 3 Chap. Five Scriptures out of the Old Testament to prove the visible appearance of Christ to the Church on earth at the time of her restauration Sect. 1. Dan. 7.11 c. to the end of the Chapter I beheld then because c. Sect. 2. Jer. 25.5 Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that I will raise unto c. Sect. 3. Zach. 2.10 11 12. collated with Zach. 14.4 5 6 c. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of Jerusalem for lo I come and I will dwell in the midst of thee c. Sect. 4. Mich. 4. v. 1. to 8. In the last dayes it shall come to passe that the mountaine of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top of the mountains and many Nations shall come c. Sect. 5. Zephan 3.14 c. Sing O daughter of Zion the Lord hath cast out c. 4 Chap. A briefe Discourse upon Christs visible appearance to the Elect on earth BOOK III. 1 Chap. The partition of the ensuing discourse shewing that two things are to be done in relation to the second branch of the Position afore How the saints shall reigne under Christ viz. 1 To prove in general That there is such a Kingdome yet to bee on earth as aforesaid in the general Position 2 What this Kingdome shall be in the particulars The first is managed by four means viz. 1 By Texts of Scripture 2 By Arguments 3 By The common consent of all sorts of men as if a law of nature 4 By Solution of objections 2 Chap. Containing many Scriptures proving that there shall be yet on earth before the last judgement such a Reigning of the Saints such a visible Kingdom of Christ and a glorious state of all things as is before propounded Sect. 1. Largâly discussing the 20 and 21. Chapters of the Revelation Sect. 3. falsely so printed for Sect. 2. and sutably the rest to the end of the third Book the usefulnes of the Old Testament for the point in hand wherein many considerable things for proof are produced Sect. 4. Gods promise to Adam Gen. 1. 26 27 28. paralleld with Psal 8. and that with Heb. 2.5 largely opened Sect. 5. Gods promise to Abraham Gen. 12. Gen. 17. Gen. 18. Gen. 22. paralleld with other promises to his posterity Gen. 26. Gen. 48. And those with the Apostles explications and applications Rom. 4 Gal. 3. Heb. 11. largely opened Sect. 6. Balaams Prophesie Num. 24. explained Sect. 7 Deut. 3.1 to 10. Sect. 8 Deut. 32.15 c. Sect. 9 Nehem. 1.8 c. Sect. 10 The Booke of Psalmes in three heads Sect. 11 Isa 2.1 c. Sect. 12 Isa 9.6 c. Sect. 13 Isa 11. totum Sect. 14 Isa 14.1 c. Sect. 15 Isa 24 23. Sect. 16 Isa 25. totum Sect. 17 Isa 33.20 21. Sect. 18 Isa 34.1 c. Sect. 19 Isa 45.14 c. Sect. 20 Isa 49. totum Sect. 21 Isa 54.11 c. Sect. 22 Isa 59. Sect. 23 Isa 60. tot Sect. 24 Isa 63.1 c. Sect. 25 Isa 65.17 c. Sect. 26 Isa 66.5 c. Sect. 27 Jer. 16.14.15 collated with chap. 23. v. 3 c. Sect. 28 Jer. 30 31 chap Sect. 29 Jer. 32.37 c. Sect. 30 Jer. 50.17 c. Sect. 31 Ez. 28.24 25 26 Sect. 32 corruptly printed 33. Ez 34.11 c. Sect. 33 Ezek 36. totum Sect. 34 Ezek. 37. tot Sect. 35 Dan. 2.31 c. Sect. 36 Dan. 7. All the ch Sect. 37 Dan. 11. 12 ch Sect. 38 Hos 1.10 11. Sect. 39 Hos 3.4 5. Sect. 40 Joel 2.28 c. Sect. 41 Joel 3.1 c. Sect. 42 Amos 9.11 c col with Ob. v. 17. c Sect. 43 Mich. 4. All. Sect. 44 Zeph. 3.9 c. Sect. 45 Zach. 2.6 c. Sect. 46 Zach. 6.12 c. Sect. 47 Zach. 8.20 c. Sect. 48 Zach. 10 3. c. Sect. 49 Zach. 12. All. Sect. 50 Zach. 14.3 c. Sect. 51 Mal. 4. All. All which places of the O.T. from Sect. 6. to the end of Sect. 51. are paralleld with several places of the New Testament 3 Chap. The inconsiderablenesse and inconsideratenesse of some ancient Authors verbal glancings against some of the prooss afore alledged Sect. 1. A general survey of the Authority of mens words and writings Sect. 2. Jeroms jerkings at the precedent proofs discussed Sect. 3. The words of Gaius seconded by Dionysius Alexandrinus both falsely fathering our opinion upon Cerinthus and weakly credited by Eusebius examined and confuted and our opinion of the thousand yeers is vindicated from voluptuous Chiliasme 4 Chap. Places produced out of the New Testament to prove the general Thesis or Position Sect. 1. Mat. 24.13 Sect. 2 Luke 1.31 32. Sect. 3 Luke 21.24 Sect. 4 Luke 22.28 c. Sect. 5 Act. 1.6 Sect. 6 Rom. 11.25 c.. Sect. 7 The 1 Cor. 15 21 c. Sect 8 The 2 Cor. 3. 15. c. Sect 9 Phil. 2.9 10. c. Sect 10 Rev. 2.25 c. Sect 11 Rev. 3.21 c. Sect 12 Revel 18 19 Chap. 5 Chap. Containing five Arguments in five distinct Sections to provethe future glorious state on earth BOOK IV. 1 Chap. Containing a Preface to the subject of this Book which is to shew the judgement of all sorts of men in favour of our main Position touching the future glorious state on earth viz. in 2 Chap. Of Heathens 3 Chap. Of Mabumetans 4 Chap. Of Jewish Rabbins
which LIGHT the other viz. The NATIONS THAT ARE SAVED that is saith Mr. Mede all the faithfull servants of God who shall bee found alive here at Christs coming SHALL WALKE IN. And I finde that through the want of distinguishing these the ancient FATHERS and particularly EPIPHANIUS have discoursed very wildly against the glorious Kingdome of Christ here on earth yet in just opposition to the CERINTHIANS whose guise it was to discourse very carnally of the glorious Kingdome of Christ The consideration whereof moved AUSTIN to relinquish the doctrine of Christ's Kingdom here on earth which formerly he imbraced as himselfe professeth in one of his bookes DE CIVITATE DEI where he treats thereof § f. 4. I have observed that as Mr. Mede hath exceeded in merit all others afore him in this Argument so others after him may goe beyond him in some particulars As Mr. Potter in the true discovery of the number of the Beast 666. with the divers mysteries in it wherewith Mr. Mede himselfe was exceedingly taken even to admiration professing it to be the greatest mystery that hath been discovered since the beginning of the world The same Mr. Potter differeth from Mr. Mede in the explication of the mystery of the two Beasts mentioned Revel 13. And I have seen an excellent Discourse thereupon but as yet hee hath not communicated it to the World § g. What cause have wee saith Dr. Twisse to blesse God for bringing us forth in these dayes of light not onely in respect of the great Reformation wrought in this Westerne part of the world an hundred yeares since and more But also opening the mystery of the slaughter of the witnesses which wee have just reason to conceive to have been on foot diverse yeers not onely by judicial proceedings in the Martyrdome of Gods Saints but by the sword of Warre 1. In the Low-Countries Then in France After that in Bohemia Then in Germany which how long it should continue Mr. Mede professeth to bee uncertaine And now amongst us * The Preface of Dr. Twisse was Printed 1643. first in Ireland then in England and that by the Antichristian generation with so manifest opposition unto truth and holinesse under a Protestant Prince in outward profession as I thinke the like was never knowne since the beginning of the World After this strange Warre and slaughter of the Witnesses which hasteneth to a period the continuance of it shall bee but three yeares and an halfe in which space of time they that dwell on the earth shall rejoyce over them and make merry c. because these Prophets tormented them that dwelt upon the earth But after three dayes and an halfe when the Spirit of life from God should enter into them and they stand on their feet great feare should fall upon them which saw them And a voice shall be heard from Heaven saying unto them Come up hither And they shall ascend up to heaven in a cloud and their enemies shall behold them But certainly when that comes to passe the same houre there shall bee an earthquake and the tenth part of the City shall fall This City undoubtedly is Rome which Mr. Mede proveth curiously to bee at this day precisely the tenth part of the City of Rome as it was in St. Johns dayes when this Prophesie came forth And in the Earthquake shall bee slaine of Names of men seven thousand which Mr. Mede interpreteth of men of quality It followeth THE SECOND WOE IS PAST Now that Woe was the plague of the Christian world by the Turkes whereby is signified the destruction of the Turkes which people I take to bee all one with GOG and MAGOG in Ezekiel represented there as the great enemies of the Jewes invading the Land of Jewry And the Hebrew Doctors conceive that War of GOG and MAGOG to be yet to come § h. Here it may bee objected that the Turke is Lord of the Land of Canaan already I grant it But when the time for calling of the Jewes shall come which Mr. Mede conceived should bee wrought in a strange manner by the appearing of Christ unto them as hee appeared unto Paul at his conversion St. Paul acknowledging that grace to have been shewed to him First implying that the same grace should bee shewed to others after him then I say upon this their conversion they shall gather themselves together from all places towards the Land of Canaan where shall bee the place of Christs Throne in his glorious Kingdome here on earth Upon which coming of the Jewes into the Land of Canaan the Grand Seignieur will bee moved to raise all his power gathered together out of all Nations under him to oppose them and at first shall prevaile as we read Ezeck 38. Zech. 14. but in the issue the Jewes shall prevail as it is in the 21. verse of Obadiah And Joel 3.12 13. c. And Zech. 14.9 So that this implies the calling of the Jewes a little afore And whereas both GOG and MAGOG shall be destroyed by fire Ezek. 39. and the MAN OF SINNE by fire Mr. Mede was of opinion that all this is but one and the same fire that shall bee at Christs coming 2 Thess 1.8 and 2.8 Then follows Christs Kingdome c. the contents of the seventh Trumpet Rev. 11.15 § 12. Clavis Apocalyptica Commentarius doctissimi NOSTRATIS Medi Latinè tum Anglicè prodeuntes celebri innotuerunt famâ plurimis librorum lectoribus de Thesi jam disputata § a. Cujus methodum excellentiam doctissimus Nostras Twissius simul cum suâ ipsius sententiâ de thesi nostrâ ita nobis reddit Multi Interpretes inquit Twissius allusione factâ ad Prov. 31.29 fecerunt apprimè Medus verò superavit omnes Nanus Gigantis humero insistens longinquius prospiciat ipso Gigante Et regulus tergo aquilae innitens lasso alite altius ascendat Attamen plurimae sunt Medi notiones tam rarâ naturâ ut quas nondum reperi cuipiam ni su is studiis benedicente Deo acceptas referri § b. In Clave suâ Apolypticâ partes Revelationis homogeneas passim dispersas eidem verò tempori competentes in unum coegit Qui sic dirigente Deo scriptis primum speciminibus quamlibet partem ita peragit ut universum cujusque scopum in transitu perspexit In de ad ampliorem progreditur Commentarium a 4. nimirum capite ad 14. unde quae sequuntur posteà non nisi sua continent specimina § c. In duobus huic operi necessariis excelluit Medus 1. In animad-vertendo verborum phrasium troporum figurarum idiomate Genio Utpote in explicandis praelii mysteriis Apocalypsis 12. demonstrat Mundum Politicum aptiùs assimilari Physico ex ipsâ Scripturarum mente pari modo adumbrante Uti enim Physicus seu naturalis ex Caelo constat terrâ Hâc varia plant arum genera procreante Illo solem lunam stellasque magnitudine diversas continente Ita Politicus
Prophet is to point out that Dominion and that Glory c. which the other foure Monarchs had And ALL PEOPLES and NATIONS and LANGUAGES should SERVE him whose dominion is for ever c. that is as long as the world below lasts all which manifestly relate to a Kingdome of Christ on earth compare v. 23 and v. 27. Thus far the Kingdome is given to Christ as if in comparison hee had none afore The vers 17. c. it is said to be the Saints Kingdome in these words These great Beasts which are foure are foure Kings that is foure Emperial Monarchies under foure races of mighty persecuting Monarchical Emperours of foure several sorts namely First Assyrio-Chaldean Secondly Medo-Persian Thirdly Grecian Fourthly Roman which shall arise out of the EARTH that is by violence succeed one another in that inheritance of the world But the Saints of the most High shall take the Kingdome that is that very Kingdome of the world that the other foure former Monarchs had and possesse the Kingdome for ever and for ever and ever that is in all ages as long as time shall bee as the original signifies adding v. 23. c. to the end of the Chapter The fourth Beast shall bee the fourth Kingdome upon earth that is the Emperour of the Roman Empire which shall bee divers from al the Kingdomes namely in Rule in Conquest and Cruelty and shall devoure the whole earth and shall tread it down and breake it in peeces meaning that the Romans shall conquer the whole world utterly defacing all Kingly dominion in the same And the ten Hornes out of this Kingdome are ten Kings that shall arise to wit the Roman Empire at last is divided into ten Kingdomes as John hath it severall times in the Revelation as a tendency to the ruine of that Empire for it follows here And another shall rise after them and he shall bee divers from the first and he shall subdue three Kings That is the Easterne Saracen-Arabian Turkish power ascending to a monstrous height of strength differing from the former in Nation Religion and Tyranny shall take away three of the said tenne Kingdomes And he shall speake great words against the most High see the Turkish Alcoran and shall weare out the Saints of the most High that is in a great measure slaying so many Christians at one battel as the tippes of their right eares filled nine sackes and thinke to change Times and Lawes that is those of divine institution as appeares also in his Alcoran and they shall bee given into his hand untill a time and times and dividing of times meaning that the Saintâ shall by divine permission fall under the Turkish power three hundred and fifty yeers from his first invading the Jewish Countries to his full and finall fall But saith the 26. v. c. to the end of the Chapter The judgement shall sit and they shall take away his dominion to consume and to destroy it to the end that is to say The Ancient of dayes as fitting in judgement judgeth to vindicate the Saints and so gives them opportunity and virility to deprive the Turke of his Kingdome and utterly to consume his power and strength And so in the 27. verse The Kingdome and Dominion UNDER the whole HEAVEN shall bee given to the people of the Saints of the most High c. That is the same Dominions of the whole world below that the former tyrannicall Monarches usurped shall now be given into the hands of the converted Jewes and holy Gentiles adhering to them to reigne on earth with Christ to whom these Dominions were delivered in the former part of this Chapter This place of the seventh of Daniel hath beene so large touching the Saints reigning with Christ on earth that we shall adde but one or two places more and that very briefly Revel 11.15 c. The seventh Angel sounded and there were great voices in heaven saying the Kingdomes of the WORLD are become the Kingdomes of our LORD and of his CHRIST or of him as CHRIST and hee shall REIGNE for ever and ever that is throughout all AGES from hence forward over the Kingdomes of the WORLD as if hitherto he had not in comparison reigned over them And the foure and twenty Elders c. fell upon their faces c. Saying we give thee thanks O Lord c. because thou hast TAKEN TO THEE THY GREAT POWER and hast REIGNED and the Nations were ANGRY which shewes this was not at the ultimate day of judgement and the time of the dead that they should bee judged is come that is the Saints should bee vindicated for so it presently followes that thou shouldest give rewards to thy servants the Prophets and to the Saints and them that feare thy name which what should it bee but to reigne on earth as it is both before expressed in the Preface Rev. 5.10 and after in the Catastrophe Revel 20.4 in regard of which reigning on earth they may bee said to bee the FIRST-FRUITS to God Rev. 14.4 because this is but the beginning of Gods worke of glorifying his Saints Let us close this Paragraph with Heb. 2.5 c. to 10. The world to come the Greek is the INHABITED world to come must be put under man though not under Angels according to Psalme 8. quoted there by the Apostle which Psalme relates to Gen. 1.26 where God gives Adam dominion over all the Creation But saith the Apostle in his time Wee see not yet all things put under him onely Jesus as the pledge is crowned with glory Therefore say I there is such a thing yet to come Let not the Reader if I may intreat so much despise the allegation of these Texts for the present purpose which are little more then barely alleadged onely to hint the Saints reigning with Christ on earth I desire to ingage him upon this request but for a time till I come to critically scan if I may assume so much confidence to my selfe these and many other places of Scripture And then upon his serious joynt view of all all together if he can bee of another minde different from mee let him for mee abound in his owne sense § 4 But to wheele about from this digression to our owne post and businesse in hand viz. the Reigning of the Saints WITH CHRIST at this time and in this place aforesaid Before they reigned but sometimes over their corruptions and Satans temptations but never over men but now totally and finally over Sinne MEN and Divels as wee shall demonstrate afterwards Their living must be after a RESURRECTION as the word is twice mentioned in this 20. of Revelation Though they bee made but spiritual Kings and Priests as the Objecters will have it in those words Rev. 5.10 Hee hath made us Kings and Priests to God yet how shall the next words be figured off from their proper sense where the Crowne of Dignity is put upon the head of REIGNING UPON EARTH Hee
till the end of Ages when they shall experimentally finde the truth of Christs predictions though at present they doe not believe Thus farre they with which wee close this third Section SECT IV. Of the fourth Scripture for Christs Personall appearance at the great Restauration of the Church 2 Thes 2.1 to 9. Now I beseech you brethren by the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ and by our gathering together unto him that yee bee not soone shaken in minde c. as that the day of Christ is at hand Let no man deceive you c. for that day shall not come except there come a falling away first and that MAN OF SINNE bee revealed the SONNE OF PERDITION who opposeth and exalteth himselfe above all that is called God c. so that he as God sitteth in the Temple of God shewing himselfe that hee is God c. And now yee know what with-holdeth that hee might bee revealed in his time For the mystery of iniquity doth already woâââ only he who now letteth will let till he be taken out of the way And then shall that WICKED bee revealed whom the Lord shall consume with the Spirit of his mouth and shall destroy with the brightnesse of his coming § 1 SHould seeme by this place that presently upon the Ascention of Christ there went abroad an expectation of the coming again of Christ afore the ultimate day of judgement which began in the Apostles themselves upon Christs discourse to them forty dayes from his Resurrection to his Ascention touching the Kingdome of God which moved them to aske him Wilt thou at this time restore againe the KINGDOME TO ISRAEL which Kingdome Christ did not deny but onely then put them off touching their knowing at present the time Act. chap. 1. v. 3. and 6. I say then when the Apostle wrote this Text there was an opinion though a mistake in it as touching the suddainnesse then that Christ would come againe afore the ultimate day of judgement For this Text speakes not of the generall destruction of the wicked world but precisely of the destruction of Antichrist by the brightnesse of Christs coming and so a way and room is made for the gathering of the Jewes and Gentiles into one universall visible Church which is to be afore the ultimate day of judgement according to the tenour of the Texts of all the Prophets of the Old Testament and the Commentary of the Apostles of the New § 2 Wee need not I conceive prove that which is granted of all and demonstrated here by all Characters that Antichrist is meant in this Text. Nor is it materiall to dispute whether the Pope or Turke be The Antichrist For Antichrist is the body viz. the race of them that effectually oppose Christ as Christ and the Pope and Turke are the two maine limbs So that in generall they are one in many respects First in the rise of their heresie For Mahumetisme was hatched by the counsell and advise of Sergius * Sergius Monachus Constantinopolitanus hereseos Nestorianae sectator Mahumetum impostorem speudo-Prophetam in Alcorano conficiendo compilando juvit eumque omnis summam impietatis docuit Zona Tom. 3. Car. Steph. a Popish Monck which he gave to Mahomet Secondly in Dominion For Dan. 7.7 8. There came up a little Horne among the ten Hornes of the fourth Beast which fourth was the Roman Monarchy before which little Horne viz. the Turke having eyes like the eyes of a man and a mouth that spake great things three of the ten Hornes were plucked up by the roots which after is explained v. 24. viz. The ten Hornes are ten Kingdomes that shall arise And another shall arise after them and hee shall be diverse from the rest and he shall subdue three Kings So that the Turke possesseth three of the ten Kingdomes that formerly were under the Pope Thirdly In their seat mentioned in this Text viz. sitting IN or rather according to the Greeke ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã OVER the Temple of God the Pope ceased to bee in the Church since the Councel of Trent where he execrates all the main Gospel-truths And the Turke is said Rev. 9.1 To be a starre fallen from the Heaven of the Church But I say they both agree in sitting UPON or OVER the Temple of God For as the Pope doth by his power sit over a great part of the Spiritual Temple namely of Christendome as they call it in which are many believers he there suppressing the propagation of the Gospel so the Turke by his power sits over the Material Temple of God viz. the place of it at Hierusalem there impeding men from imbracing the Messiah preferring Mahomet as one greater then Christ Fourthly in the number of the name 666. Rev. 13.18 For as the numerall Letters either of the Greeke λαÏÎµÎ¹Î½Î¿Ï or of the Hebrew ר××¢× ×ש both sutable names of the Pope who is a Latine and Roman make up exactly 666. λ α Ï Îµ ι ν ο Ï 30 1 300 5 10 50 70 200 ש × × ×¢ × ×¨ 300 6 50 70 40 200 So the numerall Letters of Maomet which written in Greek as R. M. in his A. C. writes it μαομεÏÎ¹Ï doth as saith the said R. M. make up just 666. μ α ο μ ε Ï Î¹ Ï 40 1. 70 40 5 300 10 200 Which number saith the same Author agrees to the time of Maomets rising in the East against Christ and the Roman Empire which was saith he in the sixth Century Fifthly In the nature of their name and the name of their nature mentioned also in this Text of the Thessal For if the Pope be the Sonne of perdition that is actively and passively to wit hee doth monstrously destroy and is at last destroyed So also is the Turk styled Rev. 9.11 both in Greek and Hebrew by the Holy Ghost His name saith John in the Hebrew is Abaddon and in Greeke Apollyon that is A Destroyer just as the word Turca as the said R. M. asserts to be the opinion of the Learned is all one with Apollyon or Abaddon a Destroyer which I say is the style of the Turke Rev. 9.11 For that Chapter cannot bee understood but of the Turke as every verse doth shew to the observing eye I list not to stay the Reader with divers other agreements betweene the Turke the Easterne Antichrist oppressing the Jewes and the Pope the Westerne Antichrist oppressing the Christians They are both effectually Antichrist evacuating Christ as Christ though the Turke doth it more openly and so doth more apparently merit the entire name of Antichrist as it signifies Against Christ For hee expressely advanceth Mahomet as a greater Prophet above Christ and hath made him a new Booke of Scriptures which he calls his Alchoran But the Pope acts it more covertly as some how pretending in some things to be for Christ and so may be called upon an external consideration pro-Christ as ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã anti Joh. 1.16 signifies For though indeed
which the Apostle Heb. 2. v. 5 6 7. c. expounds of Christ and of the inhabited world to come as the Greek is vers 5. and saith that when Christ was ascended yet then all things were not put under his feet For all must be so all saith the Apostle there v. 8. that nothing must be excepted except as 1 Cor. 15. God himselfe But of this of Heb. 2. abundantly after § 2 Secondly we answer That it is the Kingdome of God his Father because Christ reignes over it as in unspeakable union with the God-head That though he be but one person yet he hath two natures So that the sense is the Kingdome of my Father that is the Kingdom of God as it is in the Syriac ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is it iâ the Kingdome of a God-Christ or a God-man Christ For Father is ascribed in Scripture to the God-head usually in relation to Christ incarnate So that because the two natures are joyned as Collegues in one person over this Empire therefore it is called the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. And such a phrase and upon such an occasion as cleerly relates to the Kingdome whereof we speak doth the Apostle use Eph. 5.5 The words are these This know that no whoremonger nor unclean person nor covetous man c. hath any INHERITANCE in the Kingdome of CHRIST and of GOD. The Heathens never imagined that vicious persons should enter into their heavenly Elysian-fields or the blissfull immortality of soules And Inheritance more suits to Earth then Heaven And lastly after the ultimate day of judgement Christ hath no Kingdome 1 Cor. 15.28 Therefore this place of Ephes 5.5 relates to the Great Restitution as plainlier appears by paralelling another place which fully answers to that of Ephes 5.5 viz. Rev. 22.11.15 The words are these He that is filthy let him be filthy still WITHOUT are ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. the dogs the whoremongers c. when is this viz. in the time when the Throne of GOD and of the LAMB shall be and appeare glorious in the Holy City the New Jerusalem verf. 1 2 3. twice expressed There is also the like phrase of calling it the Kingdome of God and of Christ in effect Rev. 12.9.10 And the great Dragon was cast out that old Serpent called the Devill and Satan c. And I heard a loud voyce saying in Heaven Now is salvation and strength and the KINGDOME OF OUR GOD and the POWER OF HIS CHRIST So that Christ as MAN joyntly with GOD doth reigne in this Millenary Kingdome And therefore Christ speakes of new Wine New in the Kingdome of his Father before the ultimate âay of judgement For after that day Christ hath no KINGDOME nor POWER but layes downe all as wee have oft âepeated it out of 1 Cor. 15.28 God the Father is then to be all in all And therefore that expression so frequent in Rev. 20. The Saints hall reigne with Christ a thousand yeers cannot be meant of supernall eternall glory after the last judgement because that place but now quoted of 1 Cor. 15.28 affirmes that then Christ himselfe is said NOT TO REIGNE but to lay down all and to be subject unto him that put all things under him that God may be all in all so that then Christ only injoys glory with his Saints not reigne as Christ in glory SECT VI. Of the sixth Scripture for Christs Personall appearance at the great restauration of the Church 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and the dead at his appearing and his Kingdome § 1 THe Kingdome of Christ here mentioned cannot be referred to his past Government of the Church for it is expresse in the future tense now so long since his Ascention that he shall judge the quick and dead at his appearance and his Kingdom § 2 Nor can this Kingdome of Christ here spoken of signifie any Kingdome of Christ after the ultimate judgement for then Christ hath no Kingdome as but now and oft before was touched from 1 Cor. 15.28 § 3 But when Christ appeares next to judge the quicke and dead Saints to reward them and to destroy the then living incurable and incorrigible wicked by a particular day of Judgement at the beginning of the thousand yeares which is the Preface to the ultimate Judgement Christ all that while being busied in executing that first Sentence of Judicature Matth. 25. Come ye blessed of my Father inherite a kingdome provided for you according to Revel 11.15 17 18. of which much after compare Revel 19. three last verses I say when Christ shall then appeare hee shall have a Kingdome § 4 The word appearance is the same in the Greeke as that 2 Thes 2.8 so that Christ must appeare to the inhabitants of the earth where this his Kingdome is For the present as it is said Luk. 19.11 12. by Christ himselfe Christ is gone into a farre Country viz. into Heaven to take to him a Kingdom that is in the Metropolis Heaven he is to be crowned King of this his Kingdome he is to have on earth but he is to returne and then to take account of his servants in this his Kingdome and to dignifie the well-doers Christ must be the fifth Monarch Dan. 2.45 Dan. 7.13 14. I say Christ is to be the fifth Monarch The Jewes now have no King but in the last dayes they shall have David that is Christ the Sonne of David to be their King Hos 3. ver 4 5. And Christ in Acts 1. ver 3. having for forty dayes spoken of the things pertaining to the Kingdome of God and thereupon being asked by the Disciples ver 6 of his restoring the Kingdome to Israel he doth not deny the thing but only refuseth then to tell them the Time when it should be done But after he tells us by John in the Revelation as we shall see abundantly after SECT VII Of the seventh Scripture for the Personall appearance of Christ at the great restauration of the Church Acts 3.19 20 21. Repent yee therefore and be converted that your sins may be blotted out when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord. And he shall send Jesus Christ which was before preached unto you whom the Heaven must receive untill the times of restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began § 1 THis place of Scripture is the more considerable in that it is urged by some that looke upon things only with a cursory eye against Christs glorious Kingdome yet to come on earth which if well weighed speakes most strongly for it § 2 For 1. Time and especially times twice mentioned in the Plurall cannot so well relate to a state after the last Judgement when time shal be no more Rev. 10.6 7. And the Angels sware by him that liveth for ever that there should be
expect a restitution of all things before the finall and totall end of all things § 8 Moreover it is said That the Heaven must containe Christ untill the restitution of all things which cleerly infers that Christ must come out of Heaven when hee shall restore all things At the ultimate day of judgement is the destruction of Gog and Magog and ten thousands of the wicked Revel 20. Again after the ultimate day of judgement he is not the Magnus Restaurator the Great Restorer but is Subditus he is himselfe subject 1 Cor. 15.28 Therefore before that he must come out of Heaven to restore all things And how even as it is expresse in Act. 1.11 spoken by Angels and attested by Saint Luke there This same Jesus which is taken up from you into Heaven shall SO COME in I LIKE MANNER as yee have seen him GOE IN TO HEAVEN SECT VIII Of the eighth Scripture for the Personall appearance of Christ at the great restauration of the Church Matth. 23.38 39. Your house is left unto you desolate for I say unto you yee shall not see me henceforth till yee shall say Blessed is he that cometh in the name of the Lord. THis cannot be meant of Christ coming after his resurrection for it is plaine that between the time of Christs speaking this and his coming with that acclamation Blessed is he that cometh c. there must be a desolation their house or habitation to whom he speaks must be left desolate § 2 This speech is directed point blanke to the Jewes and more keenly to them inhabiting Jerusalem So the connexion O Jerusalem Jerusalem thou that killest the Prophets and stonest them that are sent unto thee how often would I have gathered thy children together even as an Hen gathereth her Chickens under her wings and yee would not behold marke the connexion or inference YOVR house is left unto YOV desolate For I say unto YOV YEE shall not see me c. Luke inserts Chap. 13.35 Christs great asseveration VERILY I say unto you yee shall not see me And expresseth it more fully that this well-coming of Christ was not hard at hand as at his resurrection in that Luke saith Yee shall not see me UNTILL THE TIME COME when yee shall say Blessed c. And Luke as well as Matthew gives us the Jewes not seeing of Christ till that time with the emphasis of a double negative ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is yee shall by no meanes or manner see me till that time which was verified in that only the Disciples or Brethren saw him at his resurrection 3 What this leaving of their house desolate is our Saviour expounds § 3 presently for having spoken in the last two verses of Mat. 23. Your house is left desolate for I say unto you yee shall not see me henceforth c. presently in the next sentence he is recorded to speake in the twenty fourth Chapter vers 1.2 Chapters being of late invention nonein the ancient bookes either in Greek or other Languages is that of the buildings even of all they behold that is of the City and expresse of the Temple there shal not be left there one stone upon another that shal not be throwne downe so that as Christ pursues the discourse vers 15. They should see the abomination of desolation set up in the HOLY PLACE expounded Luke 21.20 to be the compassing about Jerusalem with Heathenish Roman Armies And Luke 19.43 Thine enemies shal cast a trench about thee and compasse thee round and keep thee in on every side and shal lay thee even with the ground And in the sixteenth verse of that twenty third Chapter of Matthew They in Judea should fly to the mountaines and he that is in the field shal not turne backe to take his cloathes So that the leaving their house desolate is the destroying of the place and face of worship in the Temple and the grace and place of the City for to that at last it amounted in two steps whereof this was the first by Titus the Roman Emperour about seventy yeares after the birth of Christ destroying the Temple the second by Adrian the Roman Emperour about the one hundred thirty fourth yeare after Christs birth destroying the City so that the Jewes never sacrificed there any more * Buchole Ind. Chron. Ad anuum 134 ut inquit Bucholceâus intelligeretur Romanae potestati Indaeoâ subjâcere politiam Mosaicam cum Metropolis suae ruina redactam esse in niâilum effusâ jam super eam finali perpetuâque vastitate arque ita sciretur spem omnem Judaeoâum DE MESSIAE ADVEN TV quam Barcochebas id est stellae filius juxta ut simulareâur prophetiam Balaami iste Pseudo-Christus causa rebellionis hujus in Romanos inducentis cladem pâiââs indiderat extinctam Hierosolymaeque ruderibus obrutam ac sepultam esle Adrianus Christianis aliis Gentibus urbem Jerusalem inhabitandam dedit mutatâ veteri appellatione de suo nomine Aeliam nominavit 4 The word in Greek ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã used here in this twenty third of Matthew ver 38. to signifie left is in it selfe of a mild signification as in Latine missum facere and in English to lay aside a thing so that it doth not in its owne nature signifie an utter forsaking but only a leaving for a time as the couched Antithesis shew us viz. left desolate UNTILL and therefore the same Christ that is now going shall be ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã coming and whiles hereafter he is coming these Jewes of Jerusalem and of Iudea that before had been angry with them that had cryed Hosanna to him Mat. 21.9 to 16. and anon cry Crucifie him should in time to come welcome him with this acclamation Blessed is he coming so the Greek in the name of the Lord. § 5 Now this place of Scripture and this performance cannot be reserred either to the time between Christs Resurrection and Ascention or to the ultimate day of Judgement and therefore must of necessity relate to a time since his Ascention yet to come before the generall Judgement § 6 Not to the time between his Resurrection and Ascention because this is spoken as we have demonstrated to the generality of the Iewes * Mat. 23. ult Christus Judaeos ingratos ita alloquitur Dico enim vobis nequaquam me videbitis ab hee tempore usque dum dicatis benedictus qui venit in nomine Domini Quibus verbis Christus indicat Judaeos upsum âandem aliquando visuros non equidem in ultimo judicio sed ante illud quia non in ultimo judicio acclamabunt ipsi Benedictus c. tum enim trepidabunt qui non fuerint conversi ad ipsum sed illo tempore quo se ipsis ostendet ut convertat ipsos ad veramfidem Alsted in locum in Diatr De Milâan who had killed the Prophets and stoned them that were sent unto them ver 37. whose
we see him for the suffering of death crowned with glory and honour which is not a subjection of the INHABITABLE WORLD TO COME unto him much lesse of ALL THINGS therein The Angels are in Heaven as well as he and so in place they as well as hee are above the things below But Christ must have the inhabited world and All things so subject to him and ' under him as they shall not be to Angels So that if we heed the Text and that which followes the Apostle tells us that in one way and sense Christ is exalted above all viz. in his possession of the highest Heaven through sufferings But withall this is in another place then the inhabited world to come viz. the world on earth yet to succeed and upon another account then the precise formall dominion over it viz. to taste of death for every man And it was in prosecution of a designe verse 10. viz. to bring many sonnes to glory not a perfecting of a thing finished viz. of the atchievement and attainment of his absolute dominion on earth over Turkes Jewes Papists and Heathens c. But this must be Christ and his members must have absolute dominion over the world below in that estate of it that is yet to come ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the habitation of the world is not to be subjected to the Angels Heb. 2. v. 5. They are but the Churches servants It is an estate that is ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã to come after Pauls time though Christ had before ascended But it must be subject to MAN and the SONNE OF MAN v. 6. God ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã made him a little lower and ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã for a little time Christ or Christians were not lower at all then Angels in nature or spirituall condition but onely in outward dominion and state of life Phil. 2. Heb. 2. and that but for a little time till the time of that world to come on earth which must be before the last day of judgement for then is not any subjection of any thing to Saints or Christ but he and so they to lay down all dominion 1 Cor. 15.28 SECT V. Wherein the Promises God made to Abraham Gen. 12.1 2 3. Gen. 15.4 5 6. Gen. 17.1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Gen. 18.18 Gen. 22.18 paralleled with other promises to his posterity Gen. 26.4 Gen. 48.19 v. 26. and with the Apostles explications and applications of those Promises Rom. 4. v. 3. to v. 25. Gal. 3. v. 6. to 17. Heb. 11. v. 8. to 17. are discussed for the cleering of the said generall Position Gen. 12. v. 1. Now the Lord had said unto Abram Get thee out of thy Country c. Verse 2. And I will make of thee a great Nation and I will blesse thee and make thy name great and thou shalt be a blessing Verse 3. And I will blesse them that blesse thee and curse him that curseth thee and in thee all families of the earth shall be blessed Gen. 15. v. 4. Behold the word of the Lord came to Abram saying This shall not be thine heire but he that shall come forth out of thine owne bowels shall be thine heire And he brought him forth abroad and said Look now toward heaven and tell the Starres if thou be able to number them And he said unto him so shall thy seed be Vers 6 And he beleeved in the Lord and he counted it to him for righteousnesse Gen. 17. v. 1. The Lord appeared to Abram and said unto him I am the Almighty God c. Verse 2. And I will make my Covenant between me and thee and will multiply thee exceedingly Verse 3. And God talked with Abram saying Verse 4. As for me behold my Covenant is with thee and thou shalt be a Father of many Nations * In the Heb. it is both in the 4. v. 5. vers ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is A Father of a MULTITUDE of Nations Neither shall thy name be called any more Abram but thy name shall be Abraham for a Father of many Nations have I made thee * Verse 6. And I will make thee exceeding fruitfull and I will make Nations of thee and KINGS shall come of thee V. 7. And I will establish my Covenant between mee and thee and thy seed after thee in their Generations for an everlasting Covenant Verse 8. And I will give unto thee and thy seed after thee the land wherein thou art a stranger all the land of Canaan for an EVERLASTING possession and I will bee THEIR GOD. Gen 18.18 Abraham shall surely become a great and a mighty Nation and all the Nations of the earth shall be blessed in him Gen. 22. v. 15 16. The Angel of the Lord called to Abraham c. by my selfe have I sworne that in blessing I will blesse thee and in multiplying I will multiply thy seed as the starres of Heaven and as the sand which is upon the Sea-shore and thy seed shall possesse the gates of his enemies ver 18. In thy seed all the Nations of the earth shal be blessed Gen. 26.4 The Lord appeared to Isaac and said I wil make thy seed to multiply as the Stars of Heaven and wil give unto thy seed all these Countries and in thy seed shal all the Nations of the earth bee blessed Gen. 48. ver 19. And his father Jacob refused and said I know it my Sonne I know it that Manasseh is the first borne he also shal become a People and he also shall be great but truly his younger brother Ephraim shall be greater then he and his seed shal become a MVLTITUDE of NATIONS * Heb. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is THE FVLNESSE OF THE GENTILES whence the Apostles phrase Rom. 11.25 The fulnesse of the Gentiles shall come ver 20. And he blessed them in that day saying In thee shal Israel blesse saying God make thee as Ephraim and as Manasseh and he set Ephraim before Manasseh Gen. 49. ver 26. The blessings of thy Father have prevailed above the blessings of my Progenitors unto the utmost bounds of the everlasting hills they shal be on the head of Joseph and upon the crowne of the head c. Rom. 4. ver 11. And Abraham received the signe of Circumcision a seale of the righteousnesse of the faith which he had yet being uncircumcised that he might be the Father of all them that beleeve though they be not circumcised ver 13. For the promise that hee should be the Heire of the world was not to Abraham and his seed through the Law but through the righteousnesse of faith ver 16. Therefore it is of faith that it might be by grace to the end the Promise might be sure to all the the seed not to that only which is of the Law but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham who is the FATHER OF US ALL. ver 17. As it is written I have made thee a father of many
sword and mine hand take hold on judgement I will render vengeance to mine enemies and I will reward them that hate me Ver. 42. I will make mine arrowes drunke with bloud and my sword shal devour flesh and that with the bloud of the slaine and of the captives from the beginning of revenges upon the enemy Ver. 43. Rejoyce O yee Nations or GENTILES as the Apostle renders it Rom. 15.10 with his people for he wil avenge the bloud of his Servants and will render vengeance to his adversaries and will be merciful to HIS LAND and to HIS PEOPLE § 1 THese Sins of the Jewes we have knowne and those Judgements of God viz. their power to be gone and them to see scattered into corners we see to this day but we never saw or heard these Promises fulfilled according to their Tenor here mentioned § 2 First we never knew by Scripture History or Experience that the Nations of the GENTILES rejoyced with the Iewes as sharers in the same generall salvation spiritual and temporall as this Text imports according to the letter here and the spirituall extent in Rom. 15.10 For in Christ or the Apostles time the likeliest time this was not effected A few particular Jews and Proselyte Gentiles in the Acts are as nothing to make up Nations of Gentiles or the generality of the Jews to which comprehensivenesse this Text amounts The two great streams ran crosse in this manner Whiles Christ was on earth nor he or his Disciples preached in the way of the Gentiles but kept close the lost sheep of the house of Israel Matth. 10.5 And when the Gentiles received the Gospel the Jews had refused it Act. 13.45 46. The Jewes generally decryed their Christ with Crucifie him Crucifie him And of the Gentiles no Nation became Christian till after Constantine the Great his time which was above three hundred yeers after Christs incarnation and above two hundred yeers after the death of the last of the Apostles Indeed St. Paul doth in expresse quotation of the 43. vers of this 32. of Deut. in his Ep. to Rom. Chap. 15. v. 10. assert this must be fulfilled that Jewes and Gentiles must rejoyce in the common Gospel-salvation But withall he had told you before Chap. 11. that at that present the generality of the Jewes were under spiritual blindnesse and were so to be till the fulnesse of the Gentiles were come in and so they continue blinde to this very day So that instead of a reciprocal rejoycing in one anothers spirituall salvation they conceive with great indignation us to bee in an errour and we with equal sorrow conceive them to be in an errour And for temporal salvation both Jews and Gentiles were as equally interested in the sorrowful defect thereof in and after the Apostles time both being then under the Heathen Roman slavery and from thence forward were the Gentile Christians bloodily persecuted for three hundred yeers in the ten persecutions and after under the Pope as all the Jewes to this day are either dispersed as a despised people by and among all Nations or under the Turkish slavery the more is the griefe of every good Christian These premised being so apparent the next promise not yet to have been performed viz. of Gods taking a general bloody vengeance on all the enemies of the Jewes according to the many and amplified high expressions in this 32. of Deut. to that sense is of it selfe most manifest For neither the Romans nor the Turks both the grand oppressours of the Jewes for above this sixteen hundred yeers between them are with any signall signe or considerable marke destroyed with a corporall destruction As for the destruct on the enemies of the Jews in the Macchabean warres it doth not in any proportion amount to the elevation and latitude of these Deuteronomian promises Wee know all those Heroick attempts of the Jews were soon squatted flat under after-slavery The Apostle mentions their sore sufferings in those times Heb. 11. latter end Of those warres we may say as in Dan. 11.32 to 36. The people that knew their God did exploits they instructed many in War as well as in Religion yet they fall by the sword And though they are holpen with a little helpe little in time as well as in strength yet they fall And for other victories wherein the Romans having captivated Jerusalem according to Dan. 11.36 the King of the North and South Dan. 11.40 that is the Saracens and Turks come and lead that Captivity captive the Jewes all this while doe but shift and change their oppressours but their oppression is not taken away At the same rate we may value the Holy war as they call it managed by Kings called Christians maintained by a stock gathered first by the order of Templars next of St. John of Jerusalem thirdly of Knights of Malta to beat the Turke and to regaine the holy land for the Turke keeps his footing to this day with inlargements Christian Kings have been so busie in bangling with them of their owne Religion that whiles they divide that grand Blasphemer most insolently reignes as the greatest Monarch now on earth § 4 Therefore wee conclude that this place of Deuteronomy is not fulfilled till that come to passe in Rev. 19.20 21. That when the Beast and the Kings of the earth and their Armies made war against Christ the Beast was taken and with him the false Prophet and cast alive into the lake c. And the remnant were slaine with the sword and the fowles are filled with their flesh So that according to the intent and termes of this Text of Deut. 32. there is an avenging of all the servants of God viz. of Jews and Gentiles and a totall corporall ruine of all their enemies yet to be performed Of which sort of destruction there is none such at the ultimate judgement As it can be of no use to the fulnesse of Iewes and Gentiles if it come not afore therefore they must have it afore that they may as is said afore joyntly rejoyce together in each other SECT IX Wherein is considered the words of Nehemiah Chap. 1. v. 8 9 10 11 For proof of the maine of the general Proposition Nehemiah 1.8 Remember I beseech thee the word that thou commandedst thy servant Moses saying If ye transgresse I wil scatter you abroad among the Nations Verse 9. But if ye returne unto me and keep my Commandments and do them though there were of you cast out to the utmost part of Heaven yet will I gather them from thence and wil bring them into the place that I have chosen to set my name there Verse 10. Now these are thy servants and thy people whom thou hast redeemed by thy great power and by thy strong hand Vers 11. O Lord I beseech thee let now thine eare be attentive to the prayer of thy servant and to the prayer of thy servants who desire to fear thy name and prosper thy servant this
did put to death Christ and persecute the Apostles the Apostles thereupon convert the second Psalme with a part of the eighth Psalme for I suppose there is recorded but the summe into a prayer and doe turne the bent of that their prayer both upon Jews and Gentiles They lift up their voyce to God with one accord and said Lord thou art God which hast made Heaven and Earth and the Sea and all that in them is c. as it is Ps 8. who by the mouth of thy servant David hast said Psal 2. v. 1. c. why did the HEATHEN rage and the PEOPLE imagine vaine things The Kings of the earth stood up and the Rulers were gathered together against the Lord and against his Christ For of a truth against thy holy childe Jesus both HEROD and PONTIUS PILATE with the GENTILES and people of ISRAEL were gathered together for to do c. And now Lord behold their threatnings c. Both which Psalmes are prophetical of our point The eighth Psalme we opened afore and now we shall the second out of both which Psalmes though Luke records the story but briefly onely giving a touch upon the beginning of both the Apostles no doubt urged in their prayer whatsoever was in them pertinent to their desire of the advancing Christ there being farre apter pertinences to that in the sequel of those Psalmes then in the beginnings The summe of their desire is that God according to his promise in Psal 2. Psal 8. would set up the power and glory of Christ unto a predominancy over Jews and Gentiles notwithstanding all their fierce opposition at present And for a testimony that God did allow their application of those Psalms as right and did accept of their prayer grounded thereon hee fils them with the Spirit and shakes the place where they prayed Now this second Psalme is not yet fulfilled not the Apostles prayer upon it fully answered It is true that about forty yeers after Christs death came to passe that great destruction upon the Jewes their Temple City and Country too prophesied by Christ Matth. 24.1 c. And within fewer yeers Herod came to a miserable untimely end Act. 12. as also did Pilate and after him successively two and thirty Roman Emperours as the Ecclesiastical story shews us * M. Fox in his Martyr And about three hundred yeers after the incarnation of Christ Constantine the Great and many of his souldiers being converted unto Christianisme overthrew in battel his Antichristian Colleagues and their Armies that opposed it But Prophesies and Prayers as streams run on in a current still growing greater and greater in accomplishment till they rest in the maine Ocean the fulfilling of the full design of God according to the entire Plat-form God drew forth in the expresse termes of his Promises This Psalm therefore according to that rule was not fully accomplished when the Apostles turned it into a Prayer notwithstanding all the great things that Christ and his Apostles did towards the convincing of Jewes and Romans and converting many For what needed the Apostles to pray for a further fulfilling of that second Psalme if then it had been fulfilled No nor is that Psalme in any full measure fulfilled to this day the Heathen unregenerate Gentiles and the obstinate Jewish people are of the same temper still and tamper the same oppositions against Christ And God hath not hitherto so spoken to them in his wrath and vext them in his sore displeasure as to make them know that he hath set HIS KING upon his holy hill of Sion nor hath he given unto Christ the HEATHEN for his inheritance and the UTMOST PARTS OF THE EARTH for his possession to breake them that are incorrigible with a rod of Iron and to dash them in peeces like a Potters vessell to the making of the Kings and Judges of the earth wise to serve the Lord in feare c. Most Kingdomes are yet meere Heathens and the most of Kingdomes named Christians are Hereticall or disobedient unto Christ and Sion it selfe where Christ will mainly manifest his Kinglinesse is under the Turkish Mahometan Blasphemers as it was under the bloudy Heathen Romans all the time of Christ and his Apostles and the Jewes that are a maine part of his Kingdom are to this day unconverted There must yet come a time when Christs anger must be but kindled and ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã but as a little and yet then must ALL they be happy that trust in Christ Marke accurately There must be a time when Christs anger must be but kindled in comparison of the last Judgement and but as a little time * So the Hebr. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã is oft applied to time is for degree âis in kindle in respect of the speedy event of making All them that trust in Christ to be happy Now if you apply this to the time past since the Apostles made their prayer upon this Psalme it is neare one thousand six hundred and twenty years which you cannot call a little time much lesse can you call it a little time from Davids penning of it to this time And if you look forward to the ultimate Iudgement then Christs anger is not only kindled but it is totally on a flame and for ever the fire never goes out So that the fulfilling of this Psalme must be in a time between our present Age and the last Iudgement It must be at a time when Christs anger hath but a little time to be kindled and anon the Trusters in Christ to be blessed which must be when the generation or succession of the wicked opposers of Christ are perished who perishing are not said to be at their journies end at the ultimate end of the world but in the way in some notable way or race they ran in their Generation in opposing Christ as Revel 19. the three last verses These wicked ones must perish and the trusters in Christ be blessed at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ as he is Christ and King of Sion which must be before his laying downe of his Mediatorship and power at the end of all I say at some notable time of eminent manifestation of Christ For this phrase in this Psalme THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE is alwayes applied to such eminent manifestations of Christ the latter still being greater then the former As first in this second Psalme at the declaring the decree and proclaiming Christ to be King conversively of his Church and coercively over all the world of enemies Secondly at Christs resurrection Acts 13.23 and 33. Thirdly in relation to Christs appearance ere long to all the world to set up his visible Kingdome on earth of which we speake 2 ¶ For saith the Apostle Hebr. 1.5 6. unto which of the Angels said he at any time Thou art my SONNE THIS DAY HAVE I BEGOTTEN THEE And againe I will be to him a Father
beleeve Nor can this be meant of ultimate glory for this reason because we cannot be said there in any tolerable sence to injoy a Sabbatism that is as the Apostles proofe clearly drives at a rest upon or in a Seventh viz. in the seventh Trumpet in the seventh Viol in the seventh thousand yeares of the world for if this Sabbatisme or Seventh be eternity then it is there swallowed up in an infinite that cannot be numbred But if this Sabbatisme be a distinct determinate time bounded with two Resurrections the one at the beginning the other at the end then it will clearly stand numerable for a seventh but not otherwise We usually number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. over things of some semblance in quantity and quality to make a Septenarie If a streame flowes into six Rivers and then falls into the mainest Ocean it is not proper to say the Ocean is the seventh River but the continent or conteiner swallowing up all We must have seven Ages compleat and ended as we say in Leases of Lands made according to Law or else we cannot number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Free-hold or Fee-simple hath no number and therefore as the former great Ages of the world were distinct on earth by some eminent notes as they shall easily finde that consult Chronologers so shall this be as distinct likewise The rest of the Sabbath began with Gods rest after the finishing of his workes the rest in Canaan began with the conduct and Wonders done under Joshua c. so this Sabbatisme of the last thousand yeares is begun and bounded with notable Land-markes it begins with the binding of Satan the fall of the Beast and with the first Resurrection and terminated with the loosing of Satan the rising of Gog and Magog in armes and the second Resurrection so that great things are acted between the end of the Sabbatisme and the beginning of ultimate glory All this is plain in Rev. 20. to them that will read and understand Yea further unlesse this be understood of a pure rest on earth how shall we be said to Sabbatise as is intimated in a Sabbatisme It is true in a Sabbath is signified and enjoyed a rest But so we may rest on another day And every day a beleever hath several rests But we must have according to the Apostle a Sabbatismaticall rest a rare word is used by the Apostle to signifie a rare rest we must Sabbatise that is imitate or in some proportion answer to other typical Sabbaths Imitation and correspondency relate to known things foregone not to after-things never seen And we rest voluntarily as in the day of Christs power whiles he is in power from our own workes as God did from his not necessitatedly when all other occasions are removed and an immutable eternity stamped upon our condition swallowing up all and transforming it into ultimate glory We must sabbatise our restfull injoyment in time and place according to former Sabbatical Rests Therefore it must be on earth and a timeing not an eternizing And thus for the Book of Psalmes with parallels out of the New Testament SECT XI Next we come to the Prophet Isaiah wherein none will doubt that are truly acquainted with his most Evangelicall Prophesies but that we shall finde many clear places for the point in hand § 1 THe first place is in Chapter 2. Verse 1. The word c. concerning Judah and Jerusalem Vers 2. It shall come to passe in the last dayes * ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in the last daies that the mountaine of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top ** ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is In or upon the HEAD of the Mountains of the mountaines and ALL Nations shall FLOW unto it Verse 3. And many people shall goe and say Come ye and let us goe up to the mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Jacob and he will teach us of his wayes and we will walke in his paths For out of Zion shall goe forth the Law and the word of the Lord from Ierusalem Verse 4. And he shall judge among the Nations and shall rebuke many people *â* Hebr. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is Many peoples and they shall beat their swords into plow-shares and their spears into pruning hooks Nation shall not lift up a sword against Nation neither shall they learne warre any more Verse II. The lofty looks of man shall be humbled and the haughtinesse of men shall be bowed downe and the Lord alone shall be exalted in that day all which Verse is repeated againe Verse 17. Then it follows Verse 18. And the Idols he shall utterly abolish Verse 19. And they shall goe into the holes of the rocks and into the caves of the earth for feare of the Lord and for the glory of his Majesty when he ariseth to shake terribly the earth This whole Verse is againe repeated Verse 21. § 2 The first verse plainly shews what ever the Analytical conceits of men may assert that this Prophesie is ultimately and plainly concerning yea for or in the behalfe or favour of Judah and Jerusalem as the * Heb. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã su per propter juxta secundum Sept. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Symm ut refert Nobilius Drusius pro. citat Eus ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã lib. 2. p. 43. in Hier. pro Juda Ierusalem Hebrew beares and Greeks and Latines affirme Though by and by Verse 6. the Iewes are shewed the reason why they should goe into afflictions afore they have the deliverance mentioned in this Chapter Yet when it is said verse 2 and 3 It shall come to passe in the last dayes that many peoples shall say come let us goe up to the Mountaine of the Lord to the house of the God of Iacob c. for out of Zion shall goe forth the Law there can be no lesse intended then that this Prophesie doth ultimately concerne the Jewes welfare when they and the Gentiles converted shall make one glorious Christian Church on earth To this our late Annotationists on the Bible doe well consent and in some termes fairely hint part of our Thesis Here say they in this second Chapter of Isa begins a Sermon contained in the three Chapters following concerning the RESTITVTION of the Church principally UNDER CHRIST which he both beginneth Chapter 2 and after the denunciation of many heavy judgements inserted to be inflicted upon the maine body of the Jewish people for their manifold grosse and grievous sinnes at length concludes with Chap. 4. § 3 The Learned grant * Iunius Piscator Alapide Grotius Engl. Annot. that those promises in the words afore-quoted out of this Chapter do relate to the time of Christs coming and do confesse the generall that the Iews in a sublimer sense do understand them of the times of the Messiah And one of them steps a little higher and bids us for that
to compare Dan. 2.35 where all the foure Mettals are utterly broken to peeces and the little stone cut out of the mountaine became a great mountaine and filled the whole earth But I shall God assisting give you a more particular account viz. that both Iewes and Christians do understand the promises in this Chapter of a visible glorious estate of the Church yet to be on the face of the earth before the ultimate end of the world Of the latter sort wee will name onely the famous Piscator Alsted and Heurnius Of the former in briefe thus Their Talmud Gemara Sanhedrim pereck R. Ketina c. assert that this world doth continue six thousand yeers In one it shall be destroyed so as to be purified as gold and freed from the CURSE of which it is said Isa 2. The LORD ALONE SHALL BEE EXALTED IN THAT DAY And R. Scelomo quoting also this second of Isa saith The Lord shall arise and shake the earth terribly in the day of judgement when he shall breake the wicked It is usuall with the learned Iewes to call this glorious time of Christs visible Kingdome on earth a day of judgement not dissentaneous to the wont of Scripture to compellate and compare any great time of Reformation as a day of judgement Psal 50.1 c. 1 Pet. 4.17 And indeed as John shewes us Rev. 11. in the beginning of this most glorious visible Kingdome there is a beginning of the day of judgement in that the wicked alive that submit not to Christ are destroyed and the living Saints have a reward given them together with the resurrection of the deceased Saints which St. Iohn calls the first Resurrection R.D. Kimchi saith In that day in the dayes of Messiah when the Lord shall execute his judgement on the wicked THE LORD ALONE SHALL BE EXALTED Isa 2. The Lord alone shall be exalted saith he is as much as to say AND THE LORD SHALL BE KING OVER ALL THE EARTH We might quote more but for hast and brevity § 4 And this must be IN THE LAST DAYES saith the second of Isa or nearer the Hebrew IN THE LAST OF DAYES or UTMOST END OF DAYES Therefore if the Prophet had looked at no further time then that of Christs first coming in the flesh he would not have called that the last of dayes since which have passed above one thousand six hundred and fifty yeers The last of dayes properly signifies those after which Aeternity next and immediately follows As it doth after the compleating of the thousand yeers of this visible Kingdome § 5 These things being premised let us view whether the promises afore-quoted out of the second of Isaiah have been fulfilled to this day 1 ¶ Surely that in the second verse and part of the third That the mountaine of the Lords house shall be established on the HEAD of the mountaines c. and peoples shall come and say Come ye and let us goe up to the mountaine of the Lord c. hath not been hitherto fulfilled and compleated For as yet neither the visible power and glory of Christ nor of his Church so as for Gentiles to say Come let us go up c. hath been established over the HEAD the Pope of the seven Hils of Rome or over the Turk the HEAD of the foure Hils of Ierusalem or over the height of power and glory of the Hils of the generality of the PEOPLES Gentiles or Nations of the world The Church at Ierusalem such as it was in Christs time was in Captivity under the Heathen Roman Empire and so continued till the rise of the Roman Bishops and immediately after that thraldome were subdued to the Turkes who keeps them in that thraldome to this day The Heathen Romans refused at the first the Lord Christ by vote of the Senate and after persecuted his Church for many yeers And the Turks blaspheme Christ in their Alcoran and hath warred against his Church from age to age since their rise And the rest of the world for the generality are Indians Barbarians and Semi-beasts that know neither God nor themselves nor what Christ is nor what a Christian is 2 ¶ Nor was the house of the Lord established in the top of the mountaines that is upon Zion the highest of the foure Hils of Jerusalem For presently after Christs death persecution scattered Christians from Jerusalem Act. 8. And within forty yeers or thereabout after Christs ascension the Temple of Jerusalem was destroyed and after a while the City and for about three hundred yeers onward the Church of Christ was extremely persecuted by the Heathen Romans and anon after Constantines time onely excepted or little more they were sorely persecuted by the Arian Hereticks So that instead of all Nations going up to the house of the Lord on the top of the Mountaines for divine worship Christian Jews and Gentiles were scattered among all Nations And though Act. 2. there were a handfull of severall Nations at Hierusalem if they were Gentiles and not rather Jewes yet this was farre from ALL NATIONS FLOWING to it saying Come let us goe up to the house of the Lord and he will teach us of his wayes and we will walk in his pathes For the generality of those very men Act. 2. mocked the Apostles whiles they taught them the wayes of the Lord. And as at Ierusalem so in the Countries round about the Christians were every where persecuted as the history of the Acts doth all along give us a particular account 3 ¶ Nor is that fulfilled to this day which is prophesied in the fourth verse Christ hath not hitherto so judged among the Nations and rebuked many people that they have beaten their swords into plow shares and their speares into pruning-hooks so that Nation hath not lifted up sword against Nation neither learned war any more 4 ¶ Nor hath that been yet fulfilled which is in verse 10 11 12 c. to v. 17. That men have so dreaded the Majesty of the Lord that they have hid themselves That the lofty lookes of men have been humbled and their haughtinesse bowed downe That THE LORD ALONE HATH BEEN EXALTED That the day of the Lord of hosts hath been upon EVERY ONE that is proud and lofty upon all the Cedars of Lebanon and Okes of Bashan that are lifted up upon ALL the high mountaines and hills that are lifted up upon EVERY high tower upon every fenced wall upon ALL the ships of Tarshish and upon all the pleasant pictures to bow down and bring down low all these so that the Lord alone may be exalted in THAT DAY Alas ever since Christs comming in the flesh the whole world generally hath been very high proud against the Lord Christ Antichrist hath been much exalted and the Lord hath been least exalted his Honour his Cause his People have been trampled on In the time of Constantine the Great some little was done in the Roman Empire for a little time for the Church of
Christ but anon Arianisme arose then Papisme mounted up then the Beast did arise The Church is put into a Wildernesse-condition the witnesses prophesie in sackcloth one thousand two hundred and sixty yeares which are not yet expired for they have not yet laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe 5 ¶ Nor is that in the 18 19 20. verses yet fulfilled That all Idols are abolished that God hath so shaken the earth that he hath made the inhabitants thereof to cast away all their Idols and to hide themselves for feare The Territories of the Papacie extending over France Spaine Italy part of the Low Countries part of upper Germany part of Polonia part of the Indies c. are full of Idols and doe openly worship them as they say in the sight of the Sunne The great shake of these is not till the Witnesses have laine dead in the Grave three dayes and an halfe Revel 11. and then is the great fall ibid. ver 11. and when those things are shaken downe then the things that cannot be shaken viz. pure worship purely Spirituall and pure Saints shall remaine unmoved Heb. 12.27 § 6 Nor can it be rationally imagined that these things shall not be done till the ultimate day of the generall Judgement for then there is no time of establishing of the mountaine of the Lords house upon the top of the mountaine no proceeding of the word out of Zion no running and hiding from the presence of the Lord for the Sea and Grave c. shall give up their dead And all good shall be turned into an eternity of absolute glory Therefore the time of fulfilling of the Prophesies and Promises of this second of Isaiah is yet to come afore the ultimate day of the last generall Judgement * The Diatribae pars 4. of Mr. Mede lately coming forth and come to my hands since I penned this eleventh Section I thought it convenient to insert into the Margine at least his judgement of this second of Isaiah ver 2 3 4. which I will give you in his owne words HILS or MOUNTAINES saith he are States Kingdomes or Societies of men which consisting of degrees rising unto an height one above another are compared unto Mountaines raised above the ordinary plaine and levell of the earth The MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE is that State and Society of men which is called the Church and People of God REGNUM CAELORUM the Kingdome of Heaven i. e. a Kingdome whose both King and Kings Throne have their place and residence in the Heavens These words therefore are a Prophesie or Propheticall promise of the GLORIOUS EXALTATION WONDERFULL ENLARGMENT and UNHEARD-OF-PROSPERITY of this Society of men called the CHURCH above all States and Societies of men whatsoever The glory and EXALTATION is expressed in the word THE MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE SHAL BE ONE DAY EXALTED yee mounted not only above the lesser hill but above the highest mountaine though at this time it were depressed and trampled under foot by the proud enemies thereof The ENLARGMENT is in the word ALL NATIONS SHALL FLOW INTO IT i. e. though at the time of this Prophesie it were reduced to a small remnant yet the time was to come when it should not only consist of one Nation of the Jewes as then it did but of all Nations under the whole Heaven The PROSPERITY thereof begins to be described from these words ver 4. THEY SHAL BEAT THEIR SWORDS INTO PLOW-SHARES c. i. e though the greatest part of JACOB were already captive and Judah and Jerusalem in a continuall feare and no lesse danger of the Armies and invasion of the King of Babel yet the time should one day come that the People or Church of God should not only be the most exalted state upon the earth and the most ample and universall Dominion that ever was in the world but the most peaceable quiet and flourishing State that ever was since man was FIRST CREATED This is the Prophesie But now comes the Question Whether this as we have described it be and hath already been fulfilled or whether if already any wayes fulfilled whether it be not in part only performed and the full accomplishment reserved for time to come c. For here the Church is to be established on the tops of Mountaines c. so that no other State shal over-top or over-looke it much lesse trample it under feet Now whether there was ever such a time when this was compleatly fulfilled c. I leave it to any mans indifferent judgement who can compare the description of the Prophet with the stories of fore past and present times In the times immediatly after Christs PASSION I think any man will grant the Church then was neither VISIBLE nor GLORIOUS In the time of the PERSECUTING EMPEROURS when the Church had taken foot among the Gentiles and the Nations began to flow unto it it was a Society indeed VISIBLE but not GLORIOUS I am sure it was not in the TOPS of the MOUNTAINES but the Imperial Mountaine of ROME not only over-topped it but over trampled it under their feet In the time of CONSTANTINE and thereabouts after three hundred yeares cruell persecution the Sunne seemed as it were to breake forth of a Cloud but presently that glory was eclipsed and even the visibility of the Church in a manner covered with the thick and a Universally overspreading cloud of ARYANISME This ARIAN cloud was no sooner blown over but another great cloud of that fore-prophesied APOSTASIE of the Church begun to arise whereby the Churches glory was not onely eclipsed but at length againe the visibility thereof wholly overshaddowed with the thick darknesse of Idolatrous ANTICHRISTIANISME untill after a long day of darknesse it pleased God of late somewhat to dispel the cloud c. and we hope when the cloud shall be wholly consumed by the beams of the Sun of the Gospel the Church shall become not more visible then yet it is but far more glorious then ever hitherto it hath been WHEN THE FULNESSE OF THE GENTILES as St. Paul speaks SHALL COME IN. For we shall finde in the Prophesies of the Scriptures that there are two sorts and times of the CALLING OF THE GENTILES First that which should be in the REJECTION OF THE IEWS as St. Paul saith to PROVOKE THEM TO IEALOUSIE Such a calling as should be in a manner occasionall that God might not want a Church the time the Iewes were to be cast out So Rom. 11.15 The CASTING AWAY OF THE IEWS is the RECONCILING OF THE WORLD i.e. The CALLING OF THE GENTILES Whence we may see that the Apostles were not to preach Christ to the Gentiles untill being first offered to the Iewes they refused him And this is that calling of the Gentiles which hitherto hath been many yeares But there is a second and more glorious calling of the Gentiles to be found in the Prophesies of Scripture not a calling as this is
wherein the Jewes are excluded but a calling wherein the Jewes shall have a share of the greatest glory and to have a preeminence above other Nations when ALL NATIONS SHAL FLOW UNTO THEM and walke in their light for the calling of the remainder of the world which is not yet under Christ is reserved for the solemnizing of the Iewes RESTAURATION This is that calling and that time which hee calls the FVLNESSE of the GENTILES conjoyned with the saving of ALL ISRAEL Rom. 11.25 This is that time whereof he speakes That if the present FALL of the Iewes be the RICHES OF THE WORLD and their DECAY the RICHES OF THE GENTILES how much more shall their FVLNESSE be the fulnesse of the Gentiles This is that glorious time which the Prophesie of this text principally if not altogether intended which is not yet fulfilled While the Roman Iron part of Nebuchadnezzart Image stood a stone was hewne out of the mountaine without hands This is the first call of the world hitherto At length the time of the feet of the Image coming that the stone smote them the wind blowes the Image away wholly and there was no more place found for any part thereof which was no sooner done but the stone which smote the Image swelled into a great Mountaine and filled the whole earth This is the time of the fulnesse of Christs Kingdome the FULNESSE of the Gentiles This is the time when THE MOUNTAINE OF THE LORDS HOUSE shall be established on the TOPS of the MOUNTAINES namely when the small stone of Christs Kingdome which is now in being shall smite the brittle feet of the last remainder of the Romane State now subsisting in the Popedome in whom the divided toes of too many Kingdomes are united c SECT XII § 1 THe second place in Isaiah for our Thesis is chap. 9. ver 6. For unto us a childe is borne unto us a Sonne is given and the GOVERNMENT shall be on his shoulders and his name shall be called WONDERFULL Counsellor the mighty God the everlasting Father the Prince of peace Ver. 7. Of the INCREASE of his GOVERNMENT and peace there shall be NO END upon the THRONE of DAVID and upon HIS KINGDOME to ORDER IT and to ESTABLISH IT with judgement and with justice from hence-forth and for ever The zeale of the Lord of Hosts will performe this Of this place we shall speake more briefly § 2 This text is very comprehensive apparently griping within its armes a large tract of Time from Christs Incarnation throughout all the processe of his Government untill the end of the ultimate Judgement as the words from hence-forth and for ever doe expresse therefore the Reader must not hang downe his head poring only upon the Birth of Christ as it is said in the beginning of this text To us a childe is borne but must lift up his eyes to the utmost of this glorious prospect here presented in the close upon the throne of David and upon his Kingdome he shall sit to order it and to establish it c. from henceforth and for ever § 3 It is not worth while for us to content with the late Jewish Rabbins that say this text is meant of Hezekiah we heard but now that the ancienter Rabbins and Talmud and their Targum or Chalde Paraphrase following them are contrary to that interpreting this text of the Messiah as they had an invincible reason so to doe in that the stile given to him here meant is incompatible and inconsistent with any but with God incarnate that is Christ Jesus the true Messiah And as little reason had those later Rabbins to interpret this Text of Hezekiah who was borne a good space of time before the date of this Prophesie yea and divers yeers before his Father Ahaz sate upon the Throne For Hezekiah was five and twenty yeers old at his fathers death whereas Ahaz his father had reigned in all but sixteen yeers 2 Kings 16.2 and chap. 18. v. 2. § 4 Leaving therefore all improbable and impertinent conceits of men let us come to the businesse to finde out the excellent state that shall be set up under the government of the Messiah before the ultimate judgement Our late Annotationists make for me a faire preface meetly conducing to the true sense of the words which we intend That the deliverances say they of Gods people and the pulling downe of such mighty POTENTATES whether SECULAR or SPIRITUALL mark their words may not seem impossible and incredible the Prophet now proceedeth to declare who it is and what manner of person by whom all that hath been said shall be effected even the Messias the eternall Sonne of God whom God shall raise up to be the King and Governour of his Church so they But we have a more sure word to confirme this interpretation Luke 1.31 32 33. And the Angel said unto Mary c. Thou shalt conceive in thy wombe and bring forth a Sonne and shalt call his name Jesus He shall be great and shall be called the Sonne of the Highest and the Lord God shall give unto him the Throne of his FATHER DAVID and he shall reigne over the house of JACOB for EVER and of his Kingdome there shall be NO END § 5 Now lay this of Isaiah and Luke together and then read what they spell unto us Namely first That the meaning of this Text is not of spirituals onely but also of temporals The FOR in the beginning premised by Isaiah as a meet inference plainly sounds of a proof in this Text to demonstrate an assurance of the deliverance of Israel as is set forth in the fourth and fifth verses viz. Thou hast broken the yoke of his burthen and the staffe of his shoulder and the rod of his OPPRESSOUR as in the day of MIDIAN * Observe Gideons victories used to signifie this deliverance therefore not onely spiritual c. and it shall be as with battel and blood so with burning and fuel of fire But these words if weighed ** For close to the Hebrew the words run thus For every battle of the Warrier with noise and garments rowled in blood shall be also unto burning and fuel of fire cannot without violence be wrested to signifie only spirituall deliverances as our Annotationists also affirme with us whose words upon the fourth verse are these Having declared the greatnesse of their joy he proceeds to shew the ground of it their deliverance and freedome from the straits and thraldome of their enemies as well CORPORALL as Spirituall Therefore this Text is Gods giving security to his people of deliverance of them from temporall as well as spirituall oppressions troubles c. by Jesus Christ after that he hath finished the workes of his incarnation by passion resurrection ascention and assession at Gods right hand according to Psal 110. of which we have spoken plentifully afore Secondly That Christ was invested with these Attributes and Omnipotentiall Properties ãâã ãâã
in the channell of the Heathen Roman Empire for three hundred yeares anon the black streame of Arian Heresie and Persecution by it after that Popish and Turkish Persecutions with successive Monsters of Massacres Bonfires Inquisitions Suspensions Imprisonments and deadly feudes and enmities of the vast generality against the handfull of Saints throughout all Nations So that the small gleaning sprinklings or first-fruits that were reconciled to God and to one another upon Christs first coming are drowned as iâ were in the Ocean and sea of enmity that from thence forward untill now remaines with great animosity And therefore we beleeve another sence of these words viz. That at Christs next appearance there shal be a generall peace between men and between the Creatures and between both as it followes in the next Argument For it followes in the ninth verse They shall not HURT Arg. 3 NOR DESTROY observe the words nor destroy nor so much as hurt in all my HOLY MOVNTAINE observe that also And lastly observe the confirmation of all viz. That the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the sea Now though there was an increase of knowledge at Christs first coming as a fountaine and spring streame which the further it ran the larger it was sutable to Ezekiels Prophesie of the waters that arose from under the Sanctuary the Gospel of Christ began in Zion and so grew deeper and deeper yet from that time untill now the knowledge of the Lord hath not increased to a sea to cover all the earth so as to drowne all iniquity or opposition against Christ or Christians so as to work men unto that peace that there shall be neither destroying nor hurting in all the holy mountaine Sure enough it appeares by the sacred Story in the Gospel Acts and the Revelation and by experience both leading us downe from Christs Incarnation to these times that at least three parts of foure of the whole world hath not been filled with the knowledge of the Lord but have made opposition against it hurting and destroying and that too in the holy Mountaine whether we take it strictly for Zion or largely for the Church wheresoever seated Christ was condemned and Crucified and the Disciples persecuted unto a scattering at Hierusalem Jerusalem both City and Temple are laid wast by the Roman Emperours the Ten bloudy Persecutions by the Heathen Romans are continued for three hundred yeares the Arian Persecution followes that the Papall Persecution followes that the Turkish overtakes that and both continue to this day the Jewes joyning with them in opposition against the truth of Christ both at Jerusalem and where ever the Church is Beside that vast part of the world in the East and West Indies yet know not the Lord. Further it followes in the tenth verse Arg. 4 And in that day there shal be a root of Jesse which shal stand for an ensigne of the peoples so the Hebr. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã To it shal the GENTILES seek and his REST shall be glorious In which words the Prophet mainly lookes at the great call of the Gentiles as the Apostles the best Expositors have since to that purpose alledged them Rom. 15.8 9 10 11 12. Now I say that Christ was a minister of the Circumcision for the truth of God to confirme the Promises made unto the Fathers and that the GENTILES might glorifie God for this mercy as it is written For this cause I will confesse thee among the Gentiles quoted out of Psal 18.49 And againe he saith Rejoyce yee GENTILES with his people quoted out of Psal 117.1 And againe Isaiah saith viz. in the eleventh of Isa ver 10. There shall be a root of Jesse and he that shall rise to reigne over the GENTILES in him shall the Gentiles trust c. Now as there were few of the Gentiles that were brought into the faith when the Apostle quoted and applied these words to this sence we heard but now in the former argument how generally the Gentiles have and doe oppose the Gospel to this day throughout the world so the Prophets close in this eleventh of Isaiah ver 10. HIS REST SHAL BE GLORIOUS * Which the Hebrew hightens being in the Abstract viz. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã glory pure glory doth more evidently demonstrate that this place of Scripture as to the maine intent is not yet fulfilled For if we will understand inward rest the beleeving Saints afore Christs incarnation had it Psal 116.7 and often elsewhere Yea the Apostles in their troublesome times 2 Cor. 6.10 so that there needed not a Prophesie to fore-tell that which had been in past time and was at the present And if we would understand here eternall glory yet we cannot for two reasons 1. Because in this tenth verse it is said Unto the ensigne Christ the Gentiles shal SEEK which cannot consist with eternall glory no seeking then 2. Because of that in the eleventh verse immediatly following And it shall come to passe in THAT DAY that the Lord shal set his hand againe the second time to recover the remnant of his people c. from Assyria Aegypt Pathros c. things inconsistent with the state of eternall glory which last words bring us downe to the fifth Argument The fifth Argument Arg. 5 Why this place of Isaiah is not yet in the maine intent of the Prophet fulfilled is because of those words in the eleventh verse of this eleventh of Isaiah viz. And it shal come to passe in THAT DAY that the Lord shal set his hand AGAINE the SECOND TIME to recover the remnant of his people which shal be left from ASSYRIA and from AEGYPT and from PATHROS and from CUSH and from ELAM and from SHINAR and from HAMATH and from the ISLANDS OF THE SEA Observe diligently the Lord must set his hand againe the second time to recover the remnant of his people from the fore-mentioned places which clearly infer as relatives that God must doe it the first time and then next the second time Now when the Prophet Isaiah Prophesied this eleventh Chapter the Lord had not recovered his people from captivity in Assyria the first time for the two Tribes of Judah and Benjamin had not yet been there captivated the first time nor the ten Tribes for ought we can finde For Isaiah Prophesied forty yeares afore the captivity of the ten Tribes and above seventy yeares afore the captivity of the two Tribes as Bulcholcerus states the account You see before your eyes by the length of his Prophesie viz. consisting of sixty six Chapters and by the many Kings under whose reigne he Prophesied viz. Uzziah Jotham Ahaz Hezekiah the last of them that Isaiah prophesied along time and we are now but upon the eleventh of those sixty six Chapters The Two Tribes were not carried away captive till a long time after Hezekiah viz. in the time of Zedekiah King of Judah 2 Chron. 36. between which Zedekiah
intend to leave out the most of the Jewes viz. ten for two to whom those Strangers were to joyne Nor was this done at the return of the two Tribes from Babylon Then Strangers of the Gentiles joyned not with them Nor was it done at the joyning of the two handfuls the one of Jews the other of Gentiles in the history of the Acts of the Apostles For they could no way answer to Jacob and Israel and Strangers indefinitly spoken without limitation â I have often admonished that the grand prophesied promises touching Christs Kingdome have their gradual successive progressive impletions Redux Juda Juda returning from Babylon was a Type The conversion of an handfull of them in the Apostles time was but the first-fruits Rom. 11. But the fulnesse of Gentiles and Jews is yet behind Thirdly we never yet saw that in the second vers fulfilled That Christians have been servants and handmaids to the Jews in a right religious harmony and complyance For that must be the sense and good news of this promise or else Christians shall have losse and that in things concerning salvation Fourthly nor did we ever see that also in the second verse fulfilled that the Captive Jewes shall take them captive whose Captives they were and rule over their oppressours For neither in their return from Babylon did the Jewes take captive their Captivators but returned by voluntary consent of King Cyrus nor at Christs coming did they take any captive but rather were captives under Augustus and Tyberius Emperours of Rome and of Babylon too as subdued by those Romans the universal Monarchs then of the whole world If any should be of so ayery a phantasie as to evaporate this into a figure that at Christs coming the Jews took their Captivators captive in a spirituall sense of conversion let such remember themselves that Converts are the greatest Free-men Joh. 8.32 And that for the Jews then alas for them the vaile was on them 2 Cor. 3. So that they were generally in a spirituall Captivity themselves like Sampson when his eyes were put out And that Dan. c. 12. intimates that the Iews Conquest over their enemies should be corporall Neither of which Conquests do we yet see that the Jews either corporally or spiritually have subdued them that captivated them Fifthly neither was that in the second verse ever yet fulfilled That the PEOPLES or Gentiles should take the Iewes and bring them to their place c. Calvin on this place grants thus much That this was not done after the Iewes coming out of Babylon giving this reason That the Gentiles were so far from being the conduct and assistance to the Iews in their returne and settlement and to contribute their service to them therein that they did not only trouble the Iews but destroyed them from off the earth quoting Ezra 4.4 Adding that therefore this must be fulfilled in through and by Christ Thus far Calvin But when was this yet ever done by Christ Surely those seeds in Christ and the Apostles time could not be the Harvest here meant whole Iacob and Israel were not then in the land of the Lord. Nor are they to this day But are for the generall under the dominion of Turks Romans Indians and Countries in every Nation almost under heaven rather serving the Gentiles then being served of the Gentiles And therefore this cannot be done till as Dan. 2. that the little stone Christ cut out of the mountain without hands breaks to peeces the fourfold-mettaled image of all the foure Monarchies of the earth Whereas yet the Roman Monarchy in great part stands to this day Sixtly The twelve Tribes of Iacob and Israel are not yet as it is v. 3. delivered from their sorrow and fear and bondage They are in bondage being scattered amongst all Nations They are in sorrow for that scattering from their own Country And are there in fear being forced to pay tribute for their own freedome Nor were they freed from that bondage in Christs time being then Captives under the Romans Nor from their fear but for fear of the Romans if they should owne Christ they crucified him and put him to death Therefore when this deliverance is fulfilled to purpose it is done as it follows in the seventh clause and consideration v. 4 5 6 7 That the Jews shall take up this Proverb How hath the OPPRESSOUR ceased The Lord hath broken the SCEPTER of the RULERS and the staffe of the WICKED so that the WHOLE EARTH is at REST and QUIET that they break forth into SINGING But nor Scripture nor Histories nor Experience shew us that ever these things were fulfilled to this day And at the ultimate day of judgement will be no meet time for such work as every mans own reason will easily prompt Therefore it is yet to be done afore the ultimate day of judgement SECT XV. THe fifth place in Isaiah is Chapter 24. verse 23. Then the Moon shall be confounded and the Sun ashamed when the Lord of Hosts shall reigne in Mount Zion and in Jerusalem and before his Ancients gloriously * R. Kimchi upon this Chapter hath these words ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã This parasha or Section is to be fulfilled hereafter ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã In the destruction of Edom ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Afterward he shall remember the salvation of ISRAEL To understand what he means by Edome he bids us upon v. 16. Look ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã upon the destruction of ROME mentioned in the who le book of God To these few words I shall need to speak but few THEN relating to that afore in verse 22 23. fetcheth its sense from thence In that day say the 22 and 23. verses It shall come to passe that the Lord shall punish the host of the High ones that are on high and the Kings of the earth upon the earth meaning plainly as the last clause evidenceth the Gentile-Potentates and powers And they those Gentiles shall be gathered together as prisoners are gathered in the pit and shall be shut up in the prison And after many dayes THEY the Jews saith Calvin giving a strong reason * Quum igitur haec ad sustinendos FIDELES pertinerent non dubium quin IUDAEIS dicerentur apud quos potissimum fides crat aut potius nusquam apud alios apparebat shall be visited To which sense touching the Iews the subsequent words also in the next verse the Text wee are now upon do mightily concur The Moon shall be confounded c. when the Lord shall reigne before his Ancients The originall and rise of which then you now see That upon the great destruction of the impenitent Gentile-Potentates and Powers the Iewes and if you will include the penitent Gentiles it shall not grieve us shall be visited in mercy And the Moon shall be confounded c. that is the glory of the Church shall be such as the light of the Moon and
brightnesse of the Sunne shall be nothing to it At which time as it follows the Lord of Hosts in Christ Iesus saith Diodat shall reign on Mount Zion and in Ierusalem types of the universall Church and that in great glory before his Ancientours who were the Church of the Jews by blood as well as by Profession Christ being considered as man as the local circumstance of Zion and Ierusalem cals for that notion § 3 Calvin again cleerly intimateth in many circumlocutions that his sense of this Text is that Christ speaking in the future of time after Calvins time shall establish his Church on earth in a most glorious estate Ego non dubito quin persequatur Propheta c. That is I doubt not but that the Prophet prosecutes the consolation which he had touched in the former verse to this sense or effect when the Lord shall visite his people and shall purge his Church from their filthinesses he shall settle his Kingdome and that so illustrious that it shall obscure the Sunne and Stars with its splendor which kinde of speech is usuall with the Prophets as we have already seen But here Isaiah speaks of the BODY of the Church and not onely of the HEAD Seeing therefore the Lord will ESTABLISH HIS KINGDOME upon MOUNT ZION so great shall be the Magnificence thereof in the INSTAURATION of the People as that the things that otherwise shone in the sight of men shall now be as darknesse Which that he might expresse to the life be names these things that above all are most splendent The word RULING is improperly drawn to signifie Gods vengeance For although God be said to reigne when he acts the office of a Judge yet this speech so comprehending within it concerning THE KINGDOME of God in MOUNT ZION it alwayes hath the notation of mercy and salvation For hee speaketh of the RESTITUTION of the Church Whence it follows that this is not fulfilled but in Christ He making a precise mention of Elders or Ancients useth a Synecdoche which is exceeding usuall in Scripture For he taketh a speciall part of the Church for the whole body of the Church yet not without a consult purpose He calls by the name of Ancients as well the PRIESTS as other RULERS who were chiefe over Discipline and Manners by whose moderation and prudence the rest are to be governed Under their names he comprehends all the people not onely because they represent the whole body as under their shadow the people was covered but also that believers might conceive hope of a future ORDER For otherwise it would little or nothing profit that the multitude should be left dissipated in manner of a dis-membred body or confused Masse Neither is it impertinently added BEFORE the ANCIENTS that the Jewes might know that the power of God should be MANIFEST and ILLUSTRIOUS c. For SO HE REIGNES that wee may PERCEIVE HIM PRESENT WITH US For if it should be beyond our COMPREHENSION no COMFORT would redound to us thereby For GLORY others read GLORIOUSLY others GLORIOUS I had rather take it in the substantive GLORY although it makes no difference in the sense For it teacheth how great shall be the magnificence and glory of God by ERECTING THE KINGDOME OF CHRIST in that all splendor is obscured and ONLY the glory of Christ must be eminent and CONSPICUOUS Whence it follows that THEN at length God shall injoy HIS OWN RIGHT AMONG US and have his due honour WHEN ALL HIS CREATURES BEING GATHERED INTO ORDER he alone is RESPLENDENT IN OUR EYES Thus Calvin whose words and phrases here can bear no lesse then a sense favouring a visible glorious Kingdome of Christ on earth though something of it as he saith must be comprehended by faith above sense To which visibility of Christs Kingdome on earth the correlative in 22 and 23. verses answering to our relative THEN in our Text of punishing the Kings of the earth upon the earth c. doth strongly bear witnesse § 4 Now lay altogether and then judge when was this Text ever fulfilled Surely in a litterall sense as to corporall Transactions not at their returne from Babylon For then the Babylonians were not punished nor put in prison Nor were the Iews in an outward glorious condition but as in subjection still to Babylon and made a scorn by Sanballat Tobiah c. with the multitude of their adherents hindring their building discouraging their work raising lyes laying plots to indanger them So that they were as long neer upon in repairing the Temple and City of Ierusalem and setling the state thereof from the first that they began it as they had been in Captivity * See the book of Ezra Nehemiah and Haggi Nor was this Text of Isa litterally and corporally fulfilled to them at Christs being on earth being then also under captivity and reproach by the Romans â See the story of the Evangelists and Acts. and to this day in the same condition under them and all Nations in the world Nor hath this been yet fulfilled in a spiritual sense from that time to this day in that not one of ten thousand of the Gentiles admired their Levitical glory And their Ancients the Scribes Pharisees Elders and Rulers of the Synogogues and People generally opposed and persecuted Evanagelical glory And though for a spurt some few favoured the Gospel Act. 1. Act. 2. yet by and by they universally Act. 13. fell off from this Glory and so continued untill these our times § 5 Nor can these be fulfilled ãâã âltimate judgement For then Christ RULES not 1 Cor. 15. v. 24. v. 28. SECT XVI § 1 THe sixth place in Isaiah is that which followes at the heels of this viz. Chapter 25. throughout but especially from v. 7. to the end of the Chapter with some passages of the 26 Chapter being also a Song of praise for the glorious state of the Church to be especially those passages v. 14. v. 19. The late invention of Chapters may not hinder our prospect upon the continued sense of this Chapter inseparably depending on the former where in the last verse the Prophet having said THEN shall the Moon be confounded and the Sun ashamed WHEN the Lord of Hosts shall REIGN in Mount Zion and Ierusalem c. explained afore he now begins this Chapter with a solemne praise to God for his preparation to and manifestation of that his glorious Reign To give you the maine passages of the whole Chapter v. 1. O Lord thou art my God I will exalt thee c. v. 2. For thou hast made of a City an heap of a defenced City a ruine a palace of strangers to be no City it shall never be built v. 3. Therefore the strong people shall glorifie thee c. v. 4. For thou hast been a strength to the poore and needy in distresse a refuge from the storme a shadow from the heat when the blast of the terrible ones is a storme against the
wall v. 5. Thou shalt bring downe the noise of the strangers as the heat in a dry place even the heat with the shadow of a cloud the branch of the terrible ones shall be brought low v. 6. And in this Mount shall the Lord make to all people a feast of fat things c. v. 7. And the Lord will destroy in this mount the face of the covering cast over all people and the vail that is spread over all nations v. 8. He will swallow up death in victory and the Lord God will wipe away all tears from off all faces and the rebuke of his people he shal take away from off all the earth c. v. 9. And it shall be said in that day Lo this is the Lord we have waited for him c. v. 10. In this Mount shall the hand of the Lord rest and Moab shall be trodden down under him as straw to the dunghill v. 11 And he shal spread forth his hands in the midst of them as he that swimmeth c. and shall bring down their pride together with the spoyles of their hands vers 12. and last And the fortresse of the high fort of thy wals shall he bring down and lay low and bring to the ground even to the dust Chap. 26. vers 14. They are dead they shal not live they are deceased they shall not rise c. vers 19. Thy dead men shall live together with my dead body shal they rise awake and sing ye that dwel in the dust c. § 2 This Chapter you see by the connexion with the former is to the same purpose as that former Chapter and its sense is extended to the state of the Church of the New Testament that is yet to come by Apostolical Expositions and applications in all the maine parts of it which are three Viââ 1 The Destruction of the enemâââ âf the Church v. 2. amplified more afterwards 2 The Deliverance of the Church v. 4. enlarged more in the rest of the Chapter 3 The joyful state of the Church upon that their deliverance and their joy in it v. 6 7 8 and elsewhere in the Chapter All which three parts are I say by the Apostles carried downe to the state of the New Testament Church never yet fulfilled I will give three Instances The first Instance St. Ioh. in Rev. 7. makes these three parts a state yet to come v. 1 2 3. you have the Destruction of the enemy There were four Angels that had power in their hands to hurt the four quarters of the earth both by sea and land as soon as the servants of God should be sealed Those that were to be hurt were those that had held the servants of God under tribulation v. 14. And those enemies were to be hurt by a storme viz. by the blowing of the four winds upon the sea the earth and the trees v. 2 3. even as the Prophet Isa in that 25 Chap. v. 4. calls the state of the wicked a storme and compares it in their opposition against the godly to a blast of a storme dashed against the wall whose fury the wall stops breaks and scatters so that they are sheltered that stand under it So that plainly here is the destruction of the enemies of the Church prophesied by Iohn in like phrase and formes of speech as were used by the Prophet Isa in that 25. Chapter Next for the deliverance of the Church St. Iohn likewise prophesies of it in that seventh of Rev. in the same figurative speeches as the Prophet had used viz. That the Lord shall be among his people in manner of dwelling v. 15. And his people shall hunger no more nor thirst any more nor shall the same light on them or as it is in the Greek fall upon them that is a way of smiting blasting or scorching or any heat v. 16. For the Lamb which is amidst them shal feed them c. and shal wipe away all tears from their eyes v. 17. To which St. Paul speaking of the resurrection of the Saints which is before the ultimate day of judgement in 1 Cor. 15. as we have and shall demonstrate annexeth this Then shal be brought to passe that saying Death is swallowed up in victory And again the same Apostle Paul speaking of the conversion of the Jewes 2 Cor. 3. as of a thing to come after his time but yet not fulfilled but shal bee fulfilled at the great Restitution of which we speak he useth this expression and gives forth this Prophesie in the 15 and 16 verses of that 2 Cor. 3. But even to this day when Moses is read the vail is upon their hearts Neverthelesse when they shal turn to the Lord the vaile shal be taken away viz. By the presence of the Lord. All which expressions of Iohn and Paul in relation to the Churches deliverance are full to the sense and words of the Prophet in that 25 of Isaiah viz. This is the Lord we have waited for him for in this mountain shall the hand of the Lord rest v. 9 10. whereby to signifie Gods presence amongst his people And shall be a succour to his people from the fury of their enemies as the heat is sheltered off with the shadow of a cloud v. 3 and 4. And he will feed them with a feast of fat things v. 6. And he will destroy the covering cast over all people and the vail that is spread over all Nations v. 7. therefore among the rest that is upon the Jews And v. 8. he will swallow up death in victory according to the words of Paul 1 Cor. 15.54 And chap. 26. of this Prophet v. 19. compared with v. 14. They shall not rise but thy dead men shall rise * Upon this place of Isa 26.14.19 heare what the Hebrew Rabbins the Septuagint the ancient Jews and the ancient Greek and Latine Fathers say and hold R. Solomon saith They shall live that dyed for thy sake bringing in the Prophet as speaking to God ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. that is The Royal Regal or Kingly decree went forth from thy face or presence saying MY DEAD BODIES SHAL RISE AGAIN The dead bodies of my people whose bones fell for my sake to them there shall be a resurrection This by way of an Antithesis answers to that v. 14. above written The ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã REPHAIM expresse in the Hebrew Text though obmitted I know not why in the English which the Chalde and Jerom render GYANTS SHALL NOT RISE AGAIN but these shall rise againe Thus R. Solomon The REPHAIM be interprets of the WICKED ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that are remisse namely ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Who remit or slack their hands from the Law The Septuagint render it ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Hieron vivent mortui tui interfecti mei resurgent And that the ancient Iewes did interpret this place of Isaiah touching the resurrection of the dead appears by that Gemara Sanhedrim
to a full saving of the Jews by the destruction of their enemies destroying their flesh and pouring out of their blood But in all these attempts in the end the Jewes party had the worst even as Israel and Juda are still dispersed and those in Judea are still under the power of their enemy the Turk Therefore these things are yet to be fulfilled viz. at the fall of Antichrist Rev. 16.5.6 and Rev. 19. v. 19.20 21. Thou art righteous O Lord c. because thou hast judged thus For they have shed the blood of Saints and Prophets and thou hast given them blood to drinke And the Kings of the earth and their armies were gathered together to make warre against him that sate on the white horse and against his army and the beast was taken and with him the false Prophet and cast into the lake of fire c. and the rest were slaine with the sword c. SECT XXI THe twelfth place in Isaiah is in Chapter 54. v. 11. c. to the end of the Chapter Verse 11. O thou afflicted tossed with tempest and not comforted behold I will lay thy stones with faire colours and lay thy foundations with Saphires 12 And will make thy windows of Agates and thy gates of Carbuncles and all thy borders of pleasant stones 13 And all thy children shall be taught of the Lord and great shall bee the peace of thy children 14 In righteousnesse shalt thou bee established thou shalt be far from oppression for thou shalt not seare and from terrour for it shall not come neer thee 15 Whosoever shall gather together against thee shall fall for thy sake 16 Behold I have created the Smith that bringeth forth an instrument and I have created the waster to destroy 17 No weapon that is formed against thee shall prosper and every tongue that shall rise against thee in judgement shalt thou condemne This is the heritage of the servants of the Lord. § 1 If wee keep all these together in their twisted dependance here set downe and in their joynt relation and intent to the glorious estate of Jews and Gentiles conjunctively as is intimated v. 3. c. Thy seed shall inherit the Gentiles c. when were these ever fulfilled unto Christ and the Apostles dayes And therefore they doe cleerly carry downe these things far beyond the age wherein they lived upon earth Saint John prophesies that v. 11 12. of laying the Churches foundations with precious stones that it shall bee fulfilled at the great restauration of the Church yet after one thousand six hundred fifty and two to be fulfilled Rev. 21. v. 18. c. The building of the wall or New Jerusalem is of a Jasper and the City pure gold the first foundation a Jasper the second a Saphir the third a Chalcedony the fourth an Emerald c. proportionably all the twelve foundations So Christ carries downe that in the former part of the 13. verse All thy children shall be taught of God beyond his time unto after times Joh. 6.44 45. That whereas the Jews then murmured against him yet the time should come that they should be ALL TAUGHT OF GOD quoting this of Isaiah Which must the rather relate to future times after Christs time in regard of that annexed in that 13. verse of the 54 of Isaiah so closely as that with the former it makes but one period viz. ALL THY CHILDREN shall be taught of God And GREAT shall be THE PEACE OF THY CHILDREN which being not fulfilled unto Johns time he refers it to the time of the glorious state of New Jerusalem on earth Rev. 21.4 And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more death neither sorrow nor crying neither shall there be any more paine c. so that the time must come that the Jews must not have onely pure inward peace being taught of God but GREAT outward peace also which is further confirmed by that which follows in the next verses viz. v. 14 15 16 17 of this 54 of Isaiah That in righteousnesse they shall be established and they shall be far from oppression and from feare and from terrour that all opposing them shall fall and no weapon shall prosper against them c. as you have it above written before your eyes in the first Paragraph of this one and twentieth Section which Peter 2 Pet. 3. and John in Rev. Chap. 21. apply as things not fulfilled to their time unto the glorious state of the New earth that therein shall dwell righteousnesse and no uncleannesse or abomination shall enter but all tears sorrow paine crying shall be removed as we have oft repeated afore All which wee cannot but expect yet to come being never yet fulfilled but the contrary alwayes extant and to be fulfilled before the ultimate day of judgement there being nor time nor place for foundations windows precious stones teachings from God c. as above described SECT XXII THe thirteenth place in Isaiah is Chapter 59. Verse 19 20 21. When the enemy viz of the Jewes shall come in like a flood the Spirit of the Lord shall lift up a standard against him and the Redeemer shall come to Zion or out of Zion as the Apostle renders it Rom. 11.26 For if the deliverer come out of Zion hee comes first to Zion the preposition 7 having great variety of significations as in at according to or for the sake c. And unto them that turne from transgression in Jacob or as the Apostle renders it Rom. 11.26 shall turne away transgression from Jacoh * The Hebâ is ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã which may for ought I know beare to be rendred To the end to turn men from For ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã with the infinitive mood is in value a future And ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the root sometimes is used transively to turne a thing away or to turn it from viz. a termino a quo ad terminum ad quem Schindl or to convert from Pagn And ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã is oft paragogicall and sometimes put for ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã as the Masora gives instances Surely the Apostle would not pervert the Text nor could he erre The Chaldee renders it neer as the Apostle ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã To convert the transgressors of the house of Jacob. The Septuagint likewise of the best Edition in Bib. complut in Bib. Reg. Gallicanis ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã The Arab. likewise There shall come a Redeemer for Zion who shall turne away wickednesse from Jacob. As for mee this is my Covenant with them saith the Lord my spirit that is upon thee and my words which I have put into thy mouth shall not depart out of thy mouth nor out of the mouth of thy seed c. from henceforth and for ever § 1 The Prophet having in the next verses before shewed how God would recompence the enemies of the Jews according to their deeds hee presently follows
on with this that I have now presented before you So that temporall and spirituall deliverances are here conjoyned in one and the same Prophesie to which in the first verse of the next Chapter he annexeth the glory of the Church of Jewes and Gentiles conjuctively of which in the next Section Now this present place the Apostle Rom. 11.25 26 27 referres unto the great call of the Jews upon the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles both making one glorious Church which the Apostle speaks of as a thing to come to passe after his time His words are that ye may see how fully they answer to those of the Prophet Blindnesse in part is happened to Israel untill the fulnesse of the Gentiles come in and so ALL ISRAEL shall be saved as it is written THERE SHALL COME OUT OF SION THE DELIVERER and SHALL TURNE AWAY UNGODLINESSE FROM JACOB FOR THIS IS MY COVENANT UNTO THEM VVHEN I SHALL TAKE AVVAY THEIR SINNES § 2 Now this was never yet fulfilled as we plainly see by the forlorne state of the Jewes both temporall and spirituall to this day And therefore this Scripture is yet to be fulfilled and that afore the ultimate judgement which is utterly inconsistent with this Prophesie SECT XXIII THe fourteenth place in Isaiah is in Chapter 60 the very next Chapter the summe wherof our last Translators have meetly given us in saying that the Chapter is concerning the glory of the Church of the Jews converted to Christ in the accession and addition of the Gentiles The passages of most concernment to our point are § 1 Vers 1. Arise shine for thy light is come and the Lord is upon THEE v. 2. Darknesse shall cover the EARTH and grosse darknesse the PEOPLE but the Lord shall arise unto THEE and his glory shall bee seen upon THEE vers 3. And the GENTILES shall come to thy light and Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising v. 4. Thy sonnes shall come from farre and thy daughters shall be nursed at thy side v. 5. And thine heart shall be inlarged because the abundance of the Sea shall be converted unto thee and the forces of the Gentiles shall come unto thee v. 6. They of Midian and Sheba shall come they shall bring gold and incense and they shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. v. 7. All the flocks of Kedar shall be gathered together unto thee the Rammes of Nebaioth shall minister unto thee c. and I will glorifie the house of my glory v. 8.9 Who are these that flye as a cloud and as doves to their windows Surely the ISLES that wait for thee v. 10. The sonnes of the strangers shall build up thy wals and THEIR KINGS shall minister UNTO THEE v. 11.12 Thy gates SHALL BEE OPEN DAY and NIGHT that men may bring unto thee the forces of the Gentiles and that THEIR KINGS may be brought For the NATION and KINGDOME that will not serve thee SHALL PERISH v. 14. The sonnes of them that afflicted thee shal come BENDING unto thee and all that despised thee shal BOW THEMSELVES DOWN at the soles of thy feet and they shall call thee THE CITY OF THE LORD the ZION OF THE HOLY ONE OF ISRAEL v. 15. Whereas thou hast been forsaken and hated I will make thee an ETERNAL EXCELLENCY a JOY OF MANY NATIONS v. 16. Thou shalt also suck the milke of the GENTILES and the breasts of KINGS v. 17. For brasse I will bring gold for iron silver c. and I wil make thy OFFICERS PEACE and thy EXACTORS RIGHTEOUSNESSE v. 18. Violence shal be NO MORE heard in thy Land but thou shalt call thy wals SALVATION c. v. 19. THE SUNNE shal be no more THY LIGHT by day neither for brightnesse shal the MOON GIVE LIGHT unto thee BUT THE LORD SHALL BE THY EVERLASTING LIGHT and thy God thy glory v. 20. Thy Sunne shal no more go down neither shal thy Moon withdraw it selfe for THE LORD shal be thy EVERLASTING LIGHT and the daies of thy MOURNING SHALL BE ENDED v. 21. Thy PEOPLE also shal be RIGHTEOUS and they shal inherit the Land FOR EVER i. e. none after them v. 22. the close of all I the Lord wil hasten it IN HIS TIME § 2 Now I put the question to all the Learned and Libraries in the world when was ever any such estate of the Church since the Jewes going into captivity in Babylon If any are so heavy headed as falling fast asleep shall dream that all these passages concerne not a visible glorious estate of the Church on earth or that these all are already spiritually fulfilled let such know that they would be hard put to it so to expound this Chap. congruously and to tell us the time and manner and make all handsomely hang together And therefore St. John a surer Commentator having prophesied in Rev. 20. v. 4. compared with Rev. 5.10 of the Saints reigning with Christ on earth and in the 21 Ch. having given us his vision of a New EARTH and of New Jerusalem coming downe FROM heaven with many more passages of the future glory of the Church on earth of which abundantly afore severall times he goes on in that 21 Chapter to apply many of the passages of this sixtieth of Isa to that future glorious estate of the Church on earth yet to come after the fall of Antichrist which is not as wee see yet performed For example The third verse of this sixtieth of Isaiah but now presented afore your eyes is exactly so applyed Rev. 21. v. 24. And the Nations of them that are saved shal walk in the light of it that is the light of the glory of God and the Lamb as it is in the former verse and the Kings of the earth doe bring their glory and honour into it So that in the 11. and 12. verses of this sixtieth of Isaiah as you see it afore is likewise applied to that future glorious state of the Church on earth afore the ultimate judgement Rev. 21. v. 25 26. And the gates of it shall not be shut at all by day for there shal be no night there And they shal bring the glory and honour of the Nations into it So the 19. v. of this sixtieth of Isaiah is in like manner applyed in Rev. 21. v. 23. And the City had no need of the Sun neither of the MOON TO SHINE IN IT Mark to shine in it intimating that though those Planets continue in being yet there shall be no need of their shining for the glory of God doth lighten it and the Lamb is the light thereof The same is to be seen in the application of the 20 v. of this sixtieth of Isaiah in Rev. 21. v. 3 4. Behold the Tabernacle of God is with men and he wil dwel with them c. and God himselfe shal be with them c. And shal wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shal be no more death neither sorrow nor
glory to shew favour to you if we have not done well in casting you out yet the Lord should appear to their joy that had been so hated and cast out for his name sake and those their false brethren should bee ashamed § 2 In the seven and eight verses most evidently the Prophet setteth forth the manner of the conversion of the Jews I say conversion their settlement will cost longer time as it seems Dan. 12. the three last verses viz. their conversion shall bee as the birth of a child before the mother is in pain as the birth of a Nation at once which well may bee being to bee done by the appearance of Christ in the Clouds § 3 In the 10. and 11. verses All Nations must rejoyce with Jerusalem because they shall suck the breasts of her consolations that is share in her comforts ## § 4 In the twelfth verse The Lord will extend peace to Jerusalem like a River and the glory of the Gentiles like a flowing stream See a glorious conjunction of Jews and Gentiles § 5 In the 13 and 14 15 16. verses is set forth the sensible comforts of the Church and the corporall destruction of their enemies As one whom his mother comforteth so will I comfort you and ye shall be comforted in Jerusalem and when ye see this your heart shall rejoyce and your bones shall flourish like an herb and the hand of the Lord shall be known towards his servants and his indignation towards his enemies For behold the Lord will come with fire c. For by fire and by his sword will the Lord plead with all flesh and the slain of the Lord shall be many Illustrated vers 24. They shall go forth and look upon the carkasses that have transgressed against me for their worm shall not dye nor their fire be quenched and they shall be an abhorring to all flesh Which in the generall to bee taken literally is confessed both by Jews and Christians Consult our new Annotationists upon the place See Sect. 41. § 5. ¶ 2. § 6 In the 18 19 20 and 21. verses is held forth to us the congregating of all Nations both Jews and Gentiles into union of true religious worship and beholding of the glory of God and that as the Jewish Doctors expound it in his destruction of the enemies of the Church in the dayes of the Messias In the 22. verse we have the height and length of this glorious estate of the universall Church of Jews and Gentiles on earth It is no lower then a state of a new Heaven and a new Earth And it is to be perpetuated It is to remain unalterable continue say our new Annotationists for ever § 7 Now these things were never yet fulfilled according to the phrases and circumstances of the place as to the Gentiles nor in the substance as to the Jews who remaine totally unconverted to Christ and are dispersed and despised to our sorrow throughout the world But God must be true therefore these must be fulfilled and on earth before the ultimate judgement as every verse doth hint unto us And therefore St. John in the Revelation Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 and Chapter 21. doth apply these in a way of Prophesie to the glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come at the fall of Antichrist I shal give you them in summe and short because I have before so often made particular applications of them Babylon the great is fallen is fallen How much she hath glorified her selfe so much sorrow and torment shall be given her Her plagues come in one day death and mourning and famine and she shall be utterly burnt with fire Rejoyce over her thou heaven and ye holy Apostles and Prophets for God hath avenged you on her And after these things I heard a great voyce of much people c. saying Allelujah salvation and glory and honour and power unto the Lord our God for true and righteous are thy judgementss for he hath judged the great Whore that hath corrupted the earth and hath avenged the blood of his Saints And again they said Allelujah And the foure and twenty Elders said Amen Allelujah And I heard as it were the voyce of a great multitude and as the voyce of many waters and as the voyce of mighty thunderings saying Allelujah for the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth And the beast and the false Prophet were taken and cast into the lake fire And the rest were slain with the sword But the Saints reigned with Christ a thousand yeers in the new Heavens and new Earth to whom the Kings of the earth and Nations of the world bring their honour § 8 Now let him that readeth understand and consider whether he were best to beleeve his owne phantasie or the opinions of men rather then St. Johns series and system of Visions and Prophesies so aptly in phrase and matter expounding the Prophet Isaiah of a future glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come Thus of the Prophet Isaiah SECT XXVII NExt we come to the Prophet Jeremiah The first place for our purpose is in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. compared with Chapter 23. verse 3. c. to verse 9. The words of that in Chapter 16. verse 14 15. are Behold the dayes come saith the Lord that it shall be no more said The Lord liveth that brought up the children of Israel out of the land of Egypt But the Lord liveth that brought up the children of ISRAEL from the LAND OF THE NORTH and from ALL THE LANDS whither he had DRIVEN THEM and I will bring them againe into THEIR LAND that I gave unto their Fathers § 1 The Prophet calling these of whom he speaks by the name of Israel and in relation to their returne out of the Land of the NORTH and out of All Lands whither they had been driven must needs comprehend as well the ten Tribes as the two And the more cleerly to hint to us that his meaning is not onely of a reduction of them to their own Land but of their conversion unto their God and this not at a petty call of a few of them but at the great call of the generality of them all he subjoyns the bringing in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles verse 19. The Gentiles shall come unto the Lord from the ends of the earth and shall say surely our Fathers have inherited lyes c. At which time of the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles as their coming from the ends of the earth fully expresseth All Israel saith the Apostle Rom. 11.25 26. shall be saved § 2 Now let us parallel this with that in the 23. Chapter verse 3 4 5 6 7 8. wherein wee have the same expressions with further illustrations and explanations to confirme the same The words of the Prophet there are verse 3. I will gather the remnant of my flock out of ALL Countries whither I have driven them and will bring
of judgement as is fully discussed elsewhere in this Volume but do clearly comport with the beginning of the businesse of the great restauration at the generall call of the Jewes See in this third Book Chap. 2. Sect. 37. § 20. ¶ 5. c. So likewise the Apostle Paul applies the phrases and things of this 37 of Ezekiel to the times of the generall call of the Jewes Rom. 11.15 If the casting away of the Jewes be the reconciling of the World what shall be the receiving of the Jewes but LIFE FROM THE DEAD So likewise St. John in Revelation chap. 11.11 to 14 shewes plainly that the witnesses must first rise and then there was a great Earthquake and then the tenth part of the City of the whore of Babylon fals and thousands are slaine which things can have no fellowship with the ultimate day of judgement especially if we marke that the Earthquake the fall of the City and the slaughter are mentioned afore the sounding of the seventh Trumpet Now within the last of the space of which seventh Trumpet fals the ultimate judgement and therefore these things belong to the great restauration at the ruine of Antichrist and the call of the Jewes and the setting up of the glorious Church of Jewes and Gentiles for presently after ver 14 15. the seventh Trumpet sounds and the Kingdomes of the World become the Kingdoms of our Lord and of his Christ Thus of the places in Ezekiel SECT XXXV Next we come to Daniel The first place in this Prophet is in the second chapter from ver 31. to ver 36. § 1 NOw Mr. Medes lately printed Diatribae pars 4. and his Opuscula and my pen being met I shall give him the way and precedency as glad of such a strongly-learned Captaine to lead me up in the Skirmish for the truth now in hand against the many opposers thereof And the rather because perhaps such are the partiall-personalities that act some mens braines the same truth will be better accepted from his mouth then from mine Quo demum saith he * Opuscul par 2. p. 20. Arg. 2. absoluto c. i. e. The fourth Kingdom or Monarchy according to Daniel is that upon the dissolution and abolition whereof followes the consummation of Christs Kingdom * By Christs Kingdom which Mr. Mede doâh âo often mention in these âis discourses here quoted in this §. 1. he âeans as he expounds it in other places of his workes CHRISTS CHURCH as CHRISTIAN or the CHRISTIAN CHURCH OF CHRIST See before in this third book chap. 2. Sect. 12 S. in the large marginal note But the Roman Kingdome being once extinct and abolished the Kingdom of Christ shall be consummated therefore the Roman Kingdome or Monarchy is the fourth The major or first proposition is most evident from either prophesie of Daniel As concerning Nebuchadnezzars dreame thou sawest saith he chap. 2. v. 34 35. untill a stone was cut out without hands and it smoate the image upon its feet of iron and clay so that it brake them to peeces So the wind carryed them away and no place was found for them But the STONE that smote the image became a great MOUNTAINE so that it filled the whole earth That is Daniel himselfe being the Interpreter in the dayes of the fourth Kingdome or Monarchy the God of Heaven will raise up a Kingdome this is that stone cut out of the mountain which shall not for ever be destroyed and which shall not be left to another people as it befell the former Monarchies but it shall crumme and consume all those Kingdoms but it selfe shall stand for ever that is the stone of Christs Kingdome having now for many ages past been cut out of the mountaine of this world at length when the time decreed of God shall come the last parts of this image being cast out and utterly abolished though hitherto it hath been but a STONE and indeed of offence or stumbling shall then grow into an HUGE MOUNTAINE and shall fill the whole earth For the minor or second proposition That the Roman Kingdome or Monarchy being once extinct and abolished the Kingdom or Monarchy of Christ shall be consummated it is easily proved out of the New Testament For by or from the abolition of Antichrist shall the Kingdome of Christ be consummated 2 Thes 2.8 And that wicked one shall be revealed whom the Lord will consume with the spirit of his mouth and shal abolish with the splendor or brightnes of his coming or as the Syriack shall kill him with the revelation or manifestation of his coming So also it is apparent out of the Apocalyps that Antichrist shall remaine till the sounding of the seventh that is the last Trumpet which once sounding there are great voyces in Heaven THE KINGDOMES OF THE WORLD ARE BECOME THE KINGDOMS OF OUR LORD JESUS CHRIST who shall reigne for ever and ever Rev. 11.15 the very same thing which the Angel a little afore Rev. 10.6 foretold That the seventh Trumpet sounding the MYSTERY OF GOD SHALL BE FINISHED as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets But Antichrist was to rise out of the Roman Empire 2 Thes 2.7 and Revel 16. John affirmes Antichrist to be one of the seven-headed beast The foure Kingdomes in Daniel are saith Mr. Mede * Diatr par 4. p. 361.393 twice revealed first to Nebuchadnezzar in a glorious image of foure metals 2 To Daniel himselfe in a vision of foure divers beasts arising out of the Sea The intent of both is by that succession of Kingdomes to point out the time of the KINGDOME OF CHRIST which no other Kingdome should succeed or destroy Nebuchadnezzars IMAGE of MONARCHIES Dan. 2. points out TWO STATES of the Kingdome of Christ The first to be while the times of those Kingdoms of the Gentiles yet lasted typified by a STONF CUT OUT OF A MOUNTAINE WITHOUT HANDS the Monarchical STATUE YET STANDING upon his FEET The second not to be untill the UTTER DESTRUCTION and DISSIPATION OF THE IMAGE when the stone having smote it upon the feet should GROW INTO A GREAT MOUNTAINE WHICH SHOULD FILL THE WHOLE EARTH The first may be called for distinction sake REGNUM LAPIDIS the Kingdome of the Stone which is the slate of Christs Kingdome WHICH HITHERTO HATH BEEN The other REGNUM MONTIS the Kingdome of the Mountain that is of the Stone growne into a Mountaine c. which is the state of his Kingdome which hereafter shall be The INTERVALLUM between these two from the time the stone was first hewen out that is the Kingdome of Christ was first advanced untill the time it became a MOUNTAINE that is when the MYSTERY OF GOD shall be FINISHED is the subject of the Apocalypticall visions Note here that the STONE is expounded by Daniel to be that LASTING KINGDOME which the God of Heaven should set up Secondly That the STONE was hewne out of the MOUNTAINE before it SMOTE the IMAGE upon the
And that in Luk. 19. vers 11. c. to 15. He spake a parable because he was nigh to Jerusalem and because they thought that the Kingdom of God should immediately appeare c. And that in Luk. 21. ver 31. When you see these things come to passe know that the Kingdom of God is at hand See what went afore viz. The Sonne of Mans coming in a cloud with power and great glory borrowed from Daniel And that in 2 Tim. 4.1 I charge thee before God and the Lord Jesus Christ who shall judge the quicke and dead at his appearing and his Kingdom must signifie the same Kingdome that Daniel saw should be at the destruction of Antichrist and consequently the Kingdome of a thousand years which the Apocalyps includes between the beginning and the consummation of the great Judgement By these we may understand the rest Taking this for a sure ground That this expression of the Sonne of Mans coming in the cloudes of Heaven so often inculcated in the New Testament is taken from and hath referrence to the prophesie of Daniel being no where else found in the Old Testament As our Saviour also cals himselfe so frequently The Son of Man because Daniel so called him in that Vision of the great Judgement and that we might look for the accomplishment of what is there prophesied of in him It was not in vaine that when our Saviour quoted the prophesie of Daniel hee added He that readeth let him understand * Matth. 24. ver 15. Certainly the great Mystery of Christ is cheifly and most distinctly revealed in that Booke § 1 Thus out of my great respect to Mr. Medes learning having given him the precedency to speak first I shall limp after and stammer forth my own Notions such as they are § 2 In the second verse out of the strivings of the blustering spirits of ## the inhabitants of the foure quarters of the World in a Sea of Warres there ariseth a succession of foure Monarchies each in his turn ruling the greatest part of the whole earth This order or series of the foure Monarchies began with Nimrod about the year of the world one thousand seven hundred and eighty eight and afore Christ two thousand one hundred and eighty three and hath continued to this day This succession order or series of the foure Monarchies the Prophet according to his vision sets forth in the third verse under the name and notion of foure Beasts Which he explaines in the seventeenth verse to signifie four Kings or Monarches that should arise out of the earth that is by earthly means domineer over the greatest part of the earth § 3 The first Beast ver 4. is like a Lyon that had Eagles wings wherewith he was wont to lift up himselfe from the earth till they were plucked and then he was made to stand upon his feet as a man resting upon the earth and a mans heart was given unto him By all which is meant the Babylonian Monarchy which was strong like a Lyon and had wings of celerity and victory becoming the Assyrio-Chaidean Monarchy whereby it was lifted up to an Imperiall eminency above the generality of all the earth Obadiah ver 4. Jer. chap. 4. ver 13. Those his wings are plucked by Darius the Mede and Cyrus the Persian and so made to stand as a man upon his feet that is was brought down to the common rank of men And hath a mans heart given unto him that is the spirit of an ordinary man an ordinary low boates peasants plebeian spirit not an Heroick and Imperiall § 4 The second Beast vers 5. is like a Beare that raised up it selfe on one side and had three ribs in its mouth between its teeth and they said thus unto it Arise and devoure much flesh By all which is meant the Persian Monarchy which was ravenously cruell like a Bear raising up one dominion induring no Mate or Corrivall but subdued first the Medes then the Babylonians uniting all into one Monarchy Between the teeth of his mouth of his desires and power demanding and snatching more dominion he hath the three ribs of the Easterne Westerne and Southerne parts of the world by conquest compare Dan. 8.4 He ariseth and eateth much flesh in his cruell slaughterings and spoilings in pursuance of his Victories § 5 The third Beast ver 6. is like a Leopard which had upon the back of it foure wings of a fowle and had also foure heads and dominion was given to it By which is signified the Grecian Monarchy which was like a Leopard in subtilty celerity and rapacity Jer. 5.6 Hab. 1.8 Dan. 8.5 The Subtilty appeared in the policy of Philip the Father and Alexander the Sonne in laying the plot for this Monarchy slyly occasioning a quarrell to fall out with the neighbour Nations And in the cunning of Alexander in battell that would alwayes fight his supernumerous Enemy in straites where his said enemy might not have roome to bring up more of his men in fight then Alexander on his part could display in battell The swift celerity appeared in that the Grecians under the said Alexander did so suddenly within about twelve years over-run the greatest part of the world as if this Conquerour had flowne upon wings of whom the proverb was He came he saw he overcame And is therefore described in Dan. 8. by an Hee-Goate which skips as if he touched not the ground The rapacity or ravenousnesse to devoure appeared especially against the Jewes the foure heads of this Leopard and their Successors exercising matchlesse cruelty against them and every where as naturally ravenous more tearing and destroying then taking prey For Alexander and the Empire under him being the Body his four Captaines that immediately succeeded him in the Empire were the foure Heads or Rulers Dan. 8.8 and 11.4 Cassander head of Macedonia Antigonus of Asia Seleucus of Syria and Ptolomy of Egypt all possessing Imperiall dignity at once By which this Monarchy became a Monster and monstrous in devouring § 6 The fourth Beast verse 7. is so variously monstrous and strangely different that no naturall Beast nor Name is found meet to describe him onely he is said to have ten hornes and iron teeth to devour and feet to stamp the residue of the beasts under it A strange beast different from all Beasts and all the Beasts but compounded as John shewes Rev. 13. of all foure By this description of Daniel is set forth the Roman Monarchy which according to Daniels words was dreadfull and terrible to all Nations being exceeding strong to annoy them all having such teeth of warre as Scipio Pompey Caesar c. iron victors That addition of nailes of brasse ver 19. signifies their Imperiall Senate and Provinciall Magistrates who held fast whatsoever the iron teeth conquered The ten Hornes are explained by Saint John Rev. 17. to be the character of the Roman Empire and to signifie the ten Kingdomes into which at last it
all but beleevers For which work of making the Iewes beleevers the ultimate day of judgement is no time as the Monarchies of the earth need not be removed that Iewes or Gentiles may be converted many thousands beleeving in the time of all four This corporall deliverance therefore of the Iewes besides their spirituall from captivity under the fourth Monarchy not having been yet fulfilled as we see before our eyes is yet to come before the ultimate day of Judgement Which conclusion is further confirmed in that this time of the Iewes deliverance is a time of the greatest troubles defining the qualitie and NATURE of those troubles in a way of analogy and proportion to former troubles of nations ver 1. though greater in degree and not in a way of samenesse or semblance to the destruction by the lake of five at the ultimate judgement Revel 20.14 15. At which time is not an increase of the troubles of them that are the Lords delivered but a putting a totall and finall end to all their troubles § 20 If any object that it may seeme this deliverance must be at the last judgement because of two passages in this chapter the first in the first verse They shall be delivered that are found written in the booke Secondly in the second and third verses Many of them that sleep in the dust of the earth shall awake some to everlasting life some to shame and everlasting contempt And they that be wise shall shine as the brightness of the firmament and they that turn many to righteousness as the stars for ever and ever Both which passages sound much of the last judgement that is to come The ful answers to which we have in a readinesse wil demonstrate that these passages do mightily confirm the contrary we cannot but confess that many learned and pious men in times of more darknesse when few had light or will to object against any thing that such men delivered that were orthodox in the generall did imagine this place of Scripture to intend the last judgement But that we must openly oppose that sence the reasons of our answers will justifie our innocency Which reasons in the generall do arise from the circumstances antecedent and subsequent that inviron those two passages Whence we thus argue ¶ 1. It is said at the opening of that booke MANY of them that sleep in the dust shall awake some to everlasting life and some to everlasting shame c. But at the last judgement ALL shall rise Therefore this cannot be meant of the last judgement ¶ 2. It is said that at this said time spoken of by Daniel the godly called wise and converters of others shall awake though to life yet to great troubles in a time of trouble which is to continue from their awakening to the time of their blessednesse vers 11 12. forty five yeares So that this time shall be a great trying time vers 10. many thereby being tryed purified and made white the wicked on the contrary doing wickedly But the godly doe not rise at the last judgement to troubles or trialls Therefore this cannot signifie the time of the last judgement ¶ 3. The question is asked verse 6. How long shall it be to the end of these wonders Observe curiously How long shall it be to the END not how long to the BEGINNING And how long to the end of these WONDERS meaning by the relative those afore mentioned not how long to the end of the RESURRECTION But if the resurrection had been here meant it had been by far a more proper and usefull question to have inquired of the beginning of the resurrection then of its ending our welfare depending upon our sharing in the happy beginning of it which attained no matter how long it last there being no wearisomenesse in happinesse Therefore this Scripture doth not intend the Resurrection or last judgement ¶ 4. It is said vers 7. these things were to be finished when the Lord shall have accomplished to scatter the holy people But the accomplishing of the scattering of the holy people the Jewes which is by conversion of them and repossessing of them in their owne Country as the Prophets all along afore-quoted have fore-told is on all hands generally confessed to precede the resurrection and day of judgement Therefore the resurrection or last judgement is not here to be understood § 21 And therefore not to urge severall other arguments to the same purpose which might be pickt up out of the context the true meaning of the four first verses of this chapter must be to this effect And I am not left alone without the company of other pious learned men * Huet on Dan. Glimpse of Sions glory Parker in Vis and Proph. of Dan. ¶ 1. These times are said ver 1. to be troubleous times when Michael shall stand up to deliver his people the Jewes First Because the great warlike oppositions that the enemy shall then make against the corporall deliverance of them that awake at that time shall seeme but cold entertainment to new-converts For their arch-enemy the Turke is then in a great fury contending to hold his tyrannical Empire over them Secondly because of the length of these troubles from their first awakening to their quiet settling which will bee forty five years ver 11 12. So that by reason of both viz. the greatnesse and continuance of these troubles for so long many shall ver 2. fall off from that cause to which at first they were awakened and so they rise to their shame and contempt before men not as yet in hell torment ¶ 2. The book mentioned vers 1. in which all and onely they were written that should be delivered must be distinguished For there are divers bookes mentioned in Scripture both in the old and new Testament which cannot be the same book because in Rev. 20.12 there is mention of Bookes in the plurall And of another book ibid. Therfore as to our purpose we must at least distinguish of a two-fold Booke of Life First there is the book of God the Fathers eternall election Phil. 4.3 Help those women with Clement and with other my fellow labourers whose names are in the BOOKE OF LIFE Now the writing in this booke is unchangeable 2 Tim. 2.19 Secondly There is the booke of life of the Lamb touching things in time viz. of externall vocation to an outward imbracing the Gospell and a subjection to the Scepter and Kingdome of Christ unto all appearance of holinesse Revel 21. ver 27. And there shall in no wise ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Go INTO it that is the holy City new Jerusalem as it is afore in that chapter called ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã any thing that is any creature that maketh no difference between things holy and unholy but counts both as common and so defileth himselfe with things or actions impure or WORKETH or MAKETH or DOTH an ABOMINATION or a LIE but they which are written in
the dayes of his life Upon which words the Old Genevah notes and our New Annotations say thus This seven and thirtieth year of Jehojachins imprisonment was the five and fiftieth year of his age so long had Nebuchadnezzar kept him in prison And so long were his wife and children in Babylon whom Nebuchadnezzar son Evil-Merodach after his fathers death preserved to honor Thus by Gods providence the SEED OF DAVID was PRESERVED UNTO CHRIST Thus they and they say well For of Jebojachin alias Jeconiah came Salathiel a Prince c. Jer. 29.2.1 Chron. 3.17 Matth. 1.12 and so downward the Scepter doth not utterly depart from Judah till Shiloh Christ comes Gen. 49.10 Thus you see they were not altogether without a King in the time of the Babylonish captivity 2. Nor without a Priest in the said time of that captivity nor after unto Christs time Jeremiah and Ezekiel who both lived in the time of that Babylonish captivity were Priests Jer. 1.1 Ezek. 1.3 And after in the time of Antiochus Epiphanes one of the Kings of the Grecian Empire that same famous Mattathias that stood up for the rescuing of the Jews against that Antiochus was a Priest and Judas Maccabeus was his on 1 Maccab. 2.1 2 3 4 5. And chap. 3. v. 1. And unto and in Christs time there were Priests and High-Priests and Sacrifices Luk. 1.8 2.24 Matth. 26.3 Job 2.13 14. And abundantly often in all four Evangelists We conclude therefore that it is impossible âo understand these many dayes to signifie the time of Iudahs captivity in Babylon yea or as our New Annotations would have it the time since Iudahs return from Babylon till Christs ascension But these many dayes must be extended unto the conversion of the Ten Tribes as well as the two yet to come Dr. Mayer with Calvin * On those words After that long time they shall have David their King ratiocinatively speaks out our conclusion at length of words thus Calvin saith he ingenuously confesseth that by David spoken of in the Prophets Christ is alwayes set forth and therefore this long time of the Jews being without a King c. must be understood of the time immediately fore-going their imbracing the Faith of Christ and therefore not of the time of their captivity for then they had not David for their King Neither can it be understood of the time immediately going before Christs coming and after their return for then they had Princes and Priests and Sacrifices And what remaineth then but to understand it of the time that now is at the END WHEREOF the Iews shall turn to Christ And herein Gualter and Tossartus follow Ierom. § 4 All that hath been said will be yet made more evident by that ## punctual specisication of the time in the next verse following when the Israelites shall be delivered and saved viz. It shall be after that in the former verse ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in as Vatablus Grotius Arias and Jerom renders it novissimo dierum that is the last of dayes even as in like manner the Septuagint and Chalde render it ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is in the end of dayes And therefore justly doth Lyran interpret this last of dayes to be sub sinem mundi i. e. A little before the end of the world And Rabbi David Kimchi thus ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. This saith he shall come to pass in the last times in the beginning of the time of salvation when the children of ISRAEL shall return by Repentance And Dr. Mayer thus It is said that this should be in the last dayes whereby the time of the Gospel is alwayes set forth all the time afore being counted old Heb. 1.1 2. But these Novissima tempora that is these are the newest times this Latine phrase signifying the last times because all things are new Yea and AT THE LATTER END OF THEM the Jews shall be new creatures as are all that are in Christ and then the world shall be destroyed and God will make a new Heaven and a new Earth If to all these you will hear a learned Papist Alapide it is worth while because whiles an enemy to the truth in Hypothesi he telleth the very truth in thesi In the last of dayes for so he renders our Text according to the Old Latin that is saith he In the end of the world when a little afore or at the coming of Antichrist especially after the SLAYING of him the ISRAELITES and JEWES who clave to him while the said Antichrist was alive and reigned partly by remembring the Sermons and Miracles of Elijah and Enoch and partly by the Exhortations of other Preachers shall be converted unto Christ even as I have said upon the 11 chap. of the Revelation For then all Israel shall be saved Rom. 11.25 So Saint Hieronym Haymo Albert. Hug. Lyran and others Secondly I sidore and a Castro think these things to be done in the Incarnation and first coming of Christ to wit INCHOATIVELY For then A FEW of Israel BEGAN to be converted Others erre who think these things to have been performed in the relaxation of the Babylonish captivity by Cyrus Thus Alapide confesseth twice over in his works the just time of the fulfilling of these things to wards the end of the world and at the destruction of Antichrist But like a Papist he blindly supposeth that Antichrist is not yet come that so his Pope might not be thought to be Antichrist But what he hath granted is enough for our purpose truth so far prevailing upon a Papist § 5 Thus the persons i. e. the Israelites the Ten Tribes as well as the Two and the time of their deliverance being cleared next for the close of this Chapter and our consideration of this Prophet comes the deliverance it self viz. they having been so long a time humbled by great afflictions after all at the time aforesaid they shall return and seek the Lord their God and David their King That is God and his Son Christ or God in his Son Christ Even as verynear it their own Rabbins and Hebrew Doctors render it in their Chalde Paraphrase ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. i. e. After that the children of ISRAEL shall be led by REPENTANCE and shall seek the worship of their God And shall obey Christ the Son of David c. And thus the learned pious Christians viz. The Genevah Notes our New Annotations and Dr. Mayer understand it by authority of Scripture In the latter dayes Hebrew the end of dayes that is when the world now neer unto an end they shall seek David their King that is The Messias Christ the Son of David Jer. 30.9 Ezek. 34.23 24. Ezek. 37.24 Mat. 9.27 Apoc. 22.16 And his Kingdom in which Davids Kingdom is promised to be for ever Psal 72.17 i. e. To the end of the World For David himself long since is dead as the Apostle argues Acts 13.34 35 36. when he would prove that
have the mastery not their enemies But though the valley of Jehosaphat be here named by these names yet they are to be understood in intent and meaning appellatively in a larger sence as is most safe to signifie and typifie any eminent place or places where the Lord shall overthrow the incurable enemies of the beleeving Jewes For first Let any reasonable Hebrician looke into the original and he shall plainly perceive that the holy Ghost useth the name Jehosaphat onely as a Paranomasia I will bring them into the valley ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã and ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. As if we should say in English I will bring them down to the valley of Jehosaphat and there I will Jehosaphatize them that is overthrow them as Jehosaphat did his enemies Secondly Let any rational man judge whether Jehosaphat as a proper name of a place in Judea doth signifie that there and there onely God will judge the enemies of the beleeving Jewes when as their enemies are scated in every place where the Jews are scattered and those enemies shall oppose them and the beleeving Gentiles that shall help in their returne where-ever they stirre to that end Yet I contend not but that that very place may be one where of some notable overthrow of some cheife enemies of the Jewes as of the Arabians Saracens and Turkes that shall enter into the Holy Land to hinder the Jewes sitting downe and settling there Now this clause of the Prophet Joel in this third chapter was never yet fulfilled since the first Assyrio-Chaldean captivity of Israel or Iudah For the Prophet gives us a sign that this is to be done after the Jewes are sold to the Grecians The Hebrew ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in its first originall sence and use signifies to yeeld up and deliver up And so the Septuagint renders it ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã which most commonly as the composition of the word requires signifies to yeeld up or to deliver up into another mans jurisdiction and power And this transmitting of the Jews from their Native Country to Graecia seems to be charged upon several Nations who handed them from one to another vers 2 3 4 5. But the Greeks came not to any considerable repute power and jurisdiction till above two hundred years after the beginning of the Second viz. The Medo-Persian Monarchy Since which time the Jews were never delivered according to the character of the Text viz. By a destruction of their enemies and to such an effect and degrees as that no stranger should pass through Jerusalem any more verse 12 13 14 15 16 17. For we know the contrary by History Experience and sight of our own eyes in our travells § 4 The opening of this destruction of the Jews enemies at their deliverance and the collation of their happy condition when delivered will yet further demonstrate that this prophesie of Joel in this third Chapter is not yet in the main to this very day fulfilled ¶ 1. The destruction of their enemy must be very formidable v. 14 15 16 19. Multitudes multitudes in the valley of decision for the day of the Lord is near in the valley of decision the Sun and the Moon shall be darkned and the Stars shall withdraw their shining The Lord also shall roar out of Zion and utter his voice from Jerusalem and the Heavens and the Earth shall shake Egypt shall be a desolation and Edom shall be a desolate wilderness c. ¶ 2. On the otherside the happy condition of the Jews shall be as glorious as their enemies destruction shall be miserable which is interchangably enterwoven within the same verses the better to minde us that they both concur to the same time and in that method that the ruines of the enemy is the rise of the Jews Vers 16. But the Lord will be the hope of his people and the strength of the children of ISRAEL V. 17. So shall ye know that I am the Lord your God dwelling in Zion my holy Mountain then shall Jerusalem be HOLY and there SHALL NO STRANGERS PASS THROUGH HER ANY MORE V. 18. And it shall come to pass in that day that the Mountains shall drop down new Wine and the Hills shall flow with milk c. V. 20. Judah shall dwell FOR EVER and Jerusalem from GENERATION to GENERATION You see here in this Chapter a corporal destruction of all the Nations that irreconcileably oppose the Jews You see the happy condition of the Jews following thereupon to be expresly both temporal and spiritual and you see it set forth with most ample extension both for latitude and length Need I now upon things so plain spend six sentences to declare this was never yet fulfilled to the Jews since their first captivity in Babylon to this day Surely if the succeeding Monarchy punished the preceding they did withal keep the Jews under their subjection and so from Assyrians to Medes and Persians from them to the Grecians and thence to the Romans and so to the Saracens and Turks to this time the Jews have been more or less under forreign power and not a free people much less so happy or their enemies so miserable as hath been described Lastly If we mark some references of this third of Joel made § 5 by the Apostles themselves in the New Testament we shall beyond all dispute of them that believe the New Testament clear it That the prophesies of this Chapter are not yet fulfilled ¶ 1. Consider how exactly the thirteenth verse c. of this Chapter of Ioel is repeated and applied Rev. 14.15 16 17 18 19 20. to the ruine of Antichrist Put ye in saith Ioel in this third Chapter v. 13. the sickle for the Harvest is ripe come get you down for the press is full the fats overflow for their wickedness is great And then follows expresly the destruction of the enemies of the Jews as we before repeated Sutably Saint Iohn saith in the said place of the Revelation An Angel came out of the Temple crying with a loud voice to him that sate on the cloud thrust in thy sickle and reap for the time is come for thee to reap for the Harvest of the Earth is ripe And he that sate on the cloud thrust in his sickle on the Earth and the Earth was reaped And another Angel came out of the Temple which is in Heaven he also having a sharp sickle And another Angel came out from the Altar which had power over fire and cryed with a loud voice Cry to him that had the sharp sickle saying Thrust in thy sickle and gather the clusters of the Vine of the Earth for her grapes are fully ripe And the Angel thrust in his sickle into the Earth and gathered the Vine of the Earth and cast it into the great Wine-press of the wrath of God and the Wine-press was troden without the City and blood came out of the Wine-press even unto to the horse-bridles by the space
holinesse and the HOUSE OF JACOB shal possess their possessions And the HOUSE OF JACOB shall be a fire and the house of JOSEPH a flame and the house of Esau for stubble and they shall kindle in them and devoure them And they of the South shall possesse the mount of Esau and they of the plaine the Philistims and they shall possess the fields of Ephraim and the fields of SAMARIA and Benjamin shall possess Gilead And the Captivity of this Host of the children of ISRAEL shall possess that of the Canaanites even unto Zarephath and the captivity of JERUSALEM which is in Sepharad shall possess the Cities of the South And Saviours shall come upon mount Zion to judge the mount of Esau and the Kingdomes shall be the Lords In which words we have such a character of the future happy state of the Church on earth harmoniously and beautifully wreathed and inter-woven of Jewes and Gentiles converted unto Christ as yet never was but still lies upon the engagement of Gods infallible truth to be fulfilled For on the Gentiles part here expressed under so many names they are not all to be destroyed but possessed with a mixed cohabitation of Jews according to the aforesaid place of Amos with which is our present collation this of Obadiah that there shall bee a REMNANT of Edom and a REMNANT for so the grammer of the word carries it of all the Heathen among whom and by whom the name of God shall be called upon And on the Jewes part both the Kingdome of Judah now as Judah and Benjamin are called 1 King 11.13 and ch 12.20 because of the mixture of their territories as the Geneva notes well give the reason and also the Kingdome of Israel must bee here understood as sharers in the spirituall salvation and outward happinesse here so laboriously inculcated else why doth the Prophet use one while such comprehensions in words as the house of Jacob and that twise and the house of Joseph Another while such distinctions and discriminations in terms as the captivity of the host of the CHILDREN OF ISRAEL and the captivity of JERUSALEM plainly enough setting forth the two Tribes the ten Tribes and generally the learned agree that both are here understood though severally they fix the footing of their interpretations Oecolampadius saith on ver 20. Duplices facit captivitates c. that is the Prophet makes two captivities For he gives to Israel the space towards the North and then he gives to them that were of Jerusalem that is to the Tribe of Judah and Benjamin that tract which is towards Egypt Mercer hath it over and over that in the 19. verse of this Obadiah is touched the State of Judah and in the 20 verse the State of Israel Hierom saith the house of Jacob signifies Judah and the house of Joseph the ten Tribes And Ephraim the son of Joseph out of which Tribe was the Regality of Samaria intimates that the two Kingdoms were to be again coupled or re-united for the devastation of the Edomites that is as t is generally agreed among the learned both Jewes and Christians those that are incorrigible Antichristian enemies of the Kingdom of the Lord Jesus And then that which is added in the close as the corenis of this glorious internal and externall salvation of all these to be saved that Saviours in the plurall shall come upon mount Zion to judge the enemies and the Kingdome shall be the Lords is of that strength and torrent that it bears downe afore it all limitations of the meaning to their return from Babylon or the incarnation of THE SAVIOUR CHRIST whose then was the Kingdome in kind no otherwise then it was formerly when he ruled the world by his power and his Church by his Word and Spirit whereas this close THE Kingdome shall be the Lords must intend that it shall be answerable to the description from the seventeenth verse downward viz. a most holy Kingdome and withall a most visible outwardly large and glorious Kingdome and that on earth all corporall incurable Antichristian enemies sensibly falling before it Which is not only my opinion and sence of these words Mercer presents to us Ex Lyr. commenting on this Prophet thus much Odium Esau in Jacob in semine perseveravit c. that is the hatred of Esau against Iacob continued in the very seed therefore the overthrow of them is foretold Isa 21.34 Ier. 49. Ezek. 35. Amos 1. Mal. 1. This Prophet doth excellently handle and is wholly in this That as Christ is the Son of Abraham and of Israel and that after the flesh and therefore all indued with the spirit are his Brethren and belong to the seed of Abraham and of Israel so all false brethren that is ANTICHRISTS and Hypocrites belong to the seed of Esau Unto these agrees and suites whatsoever thou here readest against the Edomites Obadiahs Prophecy is smal in bulk great in sence comprehending many things in a few words He prophesieth in the behalfe of Israel against Edom prophesying the subversion of the Edomites and the GLORY of the true Israel the Church of Christ and that he alone shall reigne He saith that on mount Sion shall be deliverance and salvation which are more perfectly fulfilled according to the letter in the Church collected of all the faithfull then in mount Zion because the state of mount Zion continued but for a time but the Church abides for ever which shall be wee are confident more eminently famous in the very land of Israel when Israel in the LAST TIME SHAL RECEIVE CHRIST And their possessing their possessions or that they shall possess those that possessed them as he renders it shall he saith come to passe with illustrious glory after the LAST CONVERSION OF ISRAEL It is some-how fulfilled daily in the Elect overcoming their enemies with invincible patience But it is to be fulfilled more sublimely and gloriously in the judgement when the wicked shal openly before all be judged of the Elect. In speciall the house of Joseph is named albeit it is contained under the house of Iacob least for their worshipping of Calves and their long captivity it should be deemed as rejected Ioseph and Ephraim of which Tribe was Ieroboam are the ten Tribes whose captivity say the Hebrewes is not yet discharged But as it is said in the end of the Prophet Amos in the LAST TIME ISRAEL SHALL BE CONVERTED There are they which by Esau understand the Gentiles and by Israel the faithfull whom I contradict not There were of the Tribe of Iudah and Benjamin among the Apostles But who of the Tribe of Ephraim and Ioseph were among them is uncertaine But they on whom this Prophesie must be fulfilled must be of all Israel converted and the house of Iacob shall be a fire Who can deny this yet to bee fulfilled hereafter Apparently it shall be fulfilled when the world shall be judged For t is impossible that this should be fulfilled seeing as
novissimo dierum So the Chalde ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã So the Greeke according to the Septuagint ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã So that the state of the Church here prophesied is the last state of the Church before the end of the world at the ultimate general resurrection And therefore the notation of the time doth undeniably put us upon a looking for such a glorious state of the Church on earth as is here described as yet to come Observe secondly that all those words of the first second and third verses That the mountain of the house of the Lord shall be established in the top of the mountaines c. and many Nations shall say come let us goe up to the mountaine of the Lord c. and he will teach us c. and we will walk in his pathes c. For the law shall goe forth out of Zion c. and he shal judge among many people c. and they shall beat their swords into plow-shares c. Nation shall not lift up sword against nation neither shall they learne war any more I say that all those words are per omnia idem altogether the same with Isa 2. ver 2 3 4. largely discussed before in this third booke and chap. 2. Sect. II. S. 1 2 3 4. c. whether we transfer the consideration of them onely adding here 1. The notablenesse of the prophesie which is thus twise mentioned by two famous Prophets with so great emphasis in the same words phrases and figures 2. The words of the Geneva notes who assert in the margin that this Prophesie of the state of the Church in the last dayes relates to the time of Christs coming and to the time when THE TEMPLE shall be destroyed Which order of words import that they meant the time after that destruction of the Temple which demolished it about forty yeares after Christs ascention I say the time after that destruction for which sence they had good ground from the last verse of the chap. 3. of this prophet Micha But such a time of restauration of the Church as Micha here in this fourth chapter describes was never yet seen on earth Therefore it is yet to come 3. Our new Annotations referre this to the time intended by Joel chap. 2.28 But that time we have proved afore in this third booke chap. 2. Sect. 40. in the maine of it is not yet come to passe 4. Dr. Mayer on the fourth verse they shall sit every one under his own vine c. and there shall bee none to make them affraid hath these words And this saith he is still to bee fulfilled WHEN THIS WORLD DRAWETH NEAR TO AN END the FULNESSE OF THE GENTILES BEING COME IN and the Jewes who remaine yet blinded BEING CONVERTED TO THE FAITH OF CHRIST Wherein the Doctor speaks very home to the point in hand in the main thereof For surely this prophesie is not in the chief intent thereof fulfilled unto this day § 3 In the last place consider exactly in the remainder of the chapter from ver 4. to the end the description of the Churches yea of the Jewish Churches Prosperity Piety and Victory and thou canst not with any shew of solid divine reason imagine these things to have been ever yet fulfilled since the Jews first captivity in Babylon but remain in future to be performed afore the last universall resurrection ¶ 1. The prosperity is described vers 4. They shall every man sit under his own vine and under his owne fig-tree and none shall make them affraid vers 6. In that day I will assemble her that halteth and will gather her that is driven out and her that I have afflicted ver 7. And I will make her that halted a remnant and her that was cast off a strong Nation and the Lord shall reign over them in mount Zion FROM HENCE FORTH EVEN In Hebr. no even But it is ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã i.e. And for ever FOR EVER Now when ever was this prosperity made good to them since their Babylonish captivity and for so long time as for ever It is true two Tribes returned from Babylon about the year of the world three thousand five hundred and eighteen under the Persian Monarchy A long time it was ere they grew to a settlement of their City and Temple set up and their publick ministration set in order by reason of the opposition and undermining of Sanballat and Tobiah and their adherents So that some thinke they were neare as long in attaining to the said settlement as they had been in captivity viz. seventy years But if they had been setled at the first of that their returne yet from the year three thousand five hundred and eighteen to three thousand six hundred and forty about which time Alexander the Greeke Monarch brought Jerusalem under subjection to him are but one hundred twenty two years after which Alexander the Romans immediately subdued them and after the Romans the Saracens and Turks which is the slavish condition of all the Countries of the Jews to this day A mark of remembrance of their subjection to the Greeks is the Greek translation of the Bible called the Septuagint because it was done by about seventy Jewes at the command of the Grecian powers And as plain a Memento of their Romish subjection is that Christ was crucified under the Roman Pontius Pilat And a sufficient Memorandum of their subjection to the Turks is that they possesse Jerusalem at this day So that if wee deduct the time of the Jewes trouble under the Persian Monarchy from their first dismission by Cyrus to their settlement and make the reckoning to begin with that their settlement and to end at Alexanders coming to Jerusalem it will not amount to above seventy years that the Jews were in peace and quiet which is no more then the length of their captivity If we take into the account the time of their struggling to be settled yet all as I said before will make up but sixscore and two years and what is this in comparison to enable the Prophet to make the close and seale of this part of the Text touching their prosperity That the Lord should reign over them of Mount Sion from hence forth AND FOR EVER which must be understood of such a manifest apparent visible reigning as stands in flat opposition every way to Tyrannicall mens or conquerours reigning over them or else the Prophet had told them nothing he had made this Antithesis to their captivities under men in vaine and had expressed this his reigning in mount Zion to no purpose seeing God doth equally reign by his power over all the world and by his spirituall grace alike over beleevers where-ever they be one the face of the earth ¶ 2. Their piety is charactarised in the fifth verse For all people will walke every one in the name ELOHAIU of HIS GOD and wee will walke in the name of JEHOVAH ELOHENU of the LORD
And almost all things are by the law purged with blood and without shedding of blood no remission It was necessary therefore that the patterns of things in the Heavens should be purified with these but the HEAVENLY THINGS THEMSELVES with BETTER SACRIFICES then THESE Heb. 13.19 But to doe good and to communicate forget not for with such SACRIFICES God is well pleased Phil. 2.17 If I be offered upon the SACRIFICE and service of your faith I joy Rev. 8.3 And another Angel came and stood at the ALTAR having a golden CENSER and there was given to him much INCENSE that hee should OFFER IT with the prayers of all Saints upon the golden ALTAR which was before the Throne Thus you see how the tenth verse sets forth the conversion of the Iews which is further amplified in the eleventh verse thus In that day shalt thou not be ashamed for all thy doings wherein thou hast transgressed against me For then will I take away out of the midst of thee them that rejoyce in thy pride and thou shalt be no more haughty because of my holy mount Which is also most evidently spoken of the Jews and their conversion in that the Lord promiseth to take away their sins and in particular their pride of the Temple of which they had been formerly very sinfully proud Jer. 7.4 and that swelling was not quite down in our Saviours time Mat. 24.1 And therefore then this text was not fulfilled But when their sins shall be taken away then the judgement viz. their shame shall be taken away neither shall they be only negatively good but also positively I will saith the next verse leave in the midst of thee an afflicted and poore people and they shall trust in the name of the Lord. This last clause of trusting in the name of the Lord containes the very life and power of godlinesse As for the first clause whoever can well weigh the Hebrew * ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã and will duly consider the precedent verse and propheticall purpose of this place touching the conversion of the Jewes cannot but confesse that these words may as well and in some respect better be rendered I will cause to remaine in thee a people that is humble and meeke or poore in spirit as Arias the Septuagint and the Syriack and Arabick render it this and the rest of this verse aptly answers and stands over against as a contrary to their pride in the former verse and is the ready way to that which followes in the thirteenth verse The remnant of Israel that is all the converted as well of the ten Tribes as of the two shall not doe iniquity nor speake lyes nor shall a deceitfull tongue be found in their mouth for they shall feed and lye downe and none shall make them afraid That is they shall there abide because there shall be no danger and they shall be so holy because they shall have grace within and no temptation from without For the second part of the Jewes restitution namely their reversion into their owne Country in a glorious Church-state wee have it in the sixteen seventeen eighteen and twentieth verses thus ver 16. In that day it shall be said to Jerusalem feare thou not and to Zion let not thy hands be slack or faint Ver. 17. The Lord thy God in the midst of thee is mighty he will save he will rejoyce over thee with joy he will REST IN HIS LOVE an high and glorious expression he will joy over thee with singing Ver. 18. I will GATHER them that are sorrowfull for THE SOLEMNE ASSEMBLY who are of thee to whom the reproach of it was a burthen Ver. 20. At that time I will BRING YOV AGAINE even in the time that I GATHER YOV For I will make you a name and apraise among all people of the earth when I TVRNE BACKE YOVR CAPTIVITY before your eyes saith the Lord. In which words you have the expression of their reversion into their owne Country in capitall letters as well in sence as writing And the Lords being amidst them more then in his generall presence over the earth and his rejoycing over them with joy yea with great joy as in singing and resting in his LOVE and gathering them into the solemne assembly and to make them a name and a praise among all people of the earth can signifie no lesse then a glorious visible Church-state making them a LOVE or SPOVSE unto their LORD CHRIST For the second generall head the vocation of the Gentiles both unto an effectuall conversion unto God and a most harmonious union with the rest of the Church we have it all and in full in verse the ninth For then will I turne to the people a pure Language that they may call upon the name of the Lord to serve him with one consent Close to the Hebrew thus I will convert in the peoples a pure lip that they may call upon the name of the Lord to serve him with one shoulder I stand not to dispute it from terme to terme because they that know well the Originall and well minde the sence of the place will ease me of that labour * Junius Mutabâ in populis labium ut purum sit quo invocent omnes nomen Jehova colendo cum humero uno Hieron old Latin Reddam populis labium electum ut invocent omnes nomen Domini serviant ei humero une The Chalde ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. i. e. I will so convert in all nations one choyse speech that all may pray in the name of the Lord that they may serve him with one shoulder The Syriack Then will I restore unto the Gentiles an elect or choyse lippe that all may call upon the name of the Lord and worship him in an equall yoke but rather I will speake a word to the opening It is expresse that the Peoples Nations or Gentiles are here spoken of who upon their conversion should be exempted from the ruine on Nations in the eighth verse and should returne with the dispersed Jewes in the tenth verse and their prophane lips should be purified and their Idolatrous and blasphemous words before their false gods should be turned into holy prayers to Jehovah and they should serve him not only with one consent of minde but with one way of practise as when many lift as with one shoulder to move a thing the same way or draw equally in the same yokes fastened to the same chaine or traces § 5 The third generall the destruction of the enemies of the Church and so of the Jewes converted you have in the fourteenth fifteenth and nineteenth verses very fully You your selves who heed what you read doe perceive these three heads interchangeably interwoven to signifie that the whole of all this visible glory comes together Vers 14. Sing O Daughter of ZION shout O ISRAEL be glad and rejoyce with all thy heart O daughter of JERUSALEM Vers 15. The Lord hath
taken away thy judgement he hath cast out THINE ENEMY The King of ISRAEL is in the midst of thee even the LORD you shall not see EVILL ANY MORE Vers 19. Behold at that time I WIL UNDOE ALL THAT AFFLICT THEE and will save her that halteth and gather her that was driven out and I will get them a praise and fame in every Land where they have been put to shame Thus you see the full extent and intent of the text insomuch as never to this day can be found a capacious and adequate space of place and time wherein to lodge the fulfilling thereof and therfore waites for its turne to be performed by our God that cannot lye before the ultimate Day of Doome See for this in the first place what others hint I may say afore they are aware because the streame of their opinion runs a contrary way Doctor Mayer thus I will turne to the people a pure Language intimating the conversion of the Gentiles but least when Judgements should come upon all peoples by Nebuchadnezzar they should despaire of any such worke to be wrought among them he saith My determination is to gather the Nations to poure out mine indignation upon them as meaning that great destructions should BEFORE THIS passe through all Countries by the Chaldes then by the Persians after that by the Grecians and finally by the Romans last of all which should the conversion of the Nations to the Gospel follow Thus he Now the destructions by the Romans is not yet at an end that Empire so much of it as is left still making great destructions both spirituall and temporall in Spaine France Portugall Germany Italy c. and much more the three Hornes of the Turkish dominions broken off from that Roman enslaving the fifth part * See the account cast up afore in Sect. 40. S. 2. P. 2. or thereabout of all the world and therefore by Doctor Mayers words this generall conversion of the Gentiles is not yet come so as to convert them as he carries on the sence that are beyond the river of Ethiopia c. Calvin and our New Annotations say that This Prophesie is extended unto the time of the Gospel when not only the Gentiles shall come into the Church but also the Jewes shall returne into their owne Country that they may make one BODY with the converted Gentiles Thus they Which when it hath been ever fulfilled since the time of the Gospel let them prove that will undertake to assert it for we shall by and by give many strong reasons to the contrary and therefore according to their supposition or grant this is yet to be fulfilled Alapide saith Christ took away their pride mentioned vers 11. when having overthrowne their materiall Temple by Titus and the Romans he erected his Church in Sion transferring beleevers from that Judaicall Temple unto the Church in which as in a Schoole of humility hee teacheth the Jewes lowlinesse of minde and humbly together with the Gentiles to submit to the grace of Christ Now when ever since the overthrow of the Temple by Titus the Romane which was about forty years after the Passion of Christ did the Lord Christ erect a Church in Zion and translated the beleeving JEWES and GENTILES into it teaching the Jewes there lowlinesse of minde and together with the Gentiles humbly to submit to the grace of Christ Surely as in the thirteenth of the Acts we have it in the generall asserted from History of Divine authority that the Jewes generally refused the Gospel whereupon it was transferred to the Gentiles and there it hath continued according to Rom. 11. downe to these times leaving the Jewes in blindnesse so we have it illustrated by particulars from all the most famous Histories and Chronologies that long after Titus his ruining of the Temple the Jewes persisted in their Leviticall Sacrifices offered in the City upon the rubbish of the Temple untill Adrians overthrow of the City and his expelling the Jewes thence in the yeare after Christs Incarnation one hundred thirty foure And againe for many yeares after that being thence expulsed they persisted in Jewish sacrificing at Mamre where formerly God appeared to Abraham and so continued untill Constantine the Great who began to bee sole Emperour about the yeare of Christ three hundred and twelve overthrew their Altar there and built in the roome a Church-place of worship for the Christians And after that Julian the Apostata encouraged the Jewes out of his hatred to the Christians to rebuild the Temple of Salomon in the yeare of Christ saith Bucholcerus three hundred sixty three God wonderfully destroyed their worke by fire from Heaven And from that time to this they have been seen and heard in all Countries where they are permitted their Synagogues to worship God after the manner of the Jewish Liturgy in singing the Psalmes of David according to our Hebrew Text and reading the Law and the Prophets with tripudiations c. and doe professe as I have had it by Letters from their learned Rabbins that they hope to be saved by the Law of Moses all which doe sufficiently demonstrate that they are not yet translated into the Church erected in Sion since Titus his devastation of Salomons Temple so that this Scripture of Zephanie remaines yet to be fulfilled which I make thus to appeare ¶ 1. Observe how many Parties are here mentioned that must have a share in the fulfilling of this Prophesie when ever it be fulfilled viz. First The Gentiles ver 9. Secondly the two Tribes of the Jewes called Juda expressed in the words Zion and Jerusalem ver 14. 16. Thirdly The ten Tribes of the Jewes called by their name Israel ver 14. but all these three parties have not yet joyntly shared in the mercies prophesied to them in this Text therefore it remaines yet to be fulfilled ¶ 2. Observe the parts or things to be shared among those Parties viz. conversion unto the true God congregating of them into a christian Church and destruction of all that hate them as you have heard Now when did the Gentiles the people of Judah and the Tribes of Israel ever joyntly injoy these three mercies For ¶ 3. Observe all these must at the great time of fulfilling them be extant at once together for though in the discusse I distinguished them into parts according to their nature and sence yet the Prophet according to place and order of sentences did interweave and windingly wreath them one within another to the intent that no man might separate what God had joyned together but might behold them as a goodly Coine that though there be a distinction of the parts of the impressions upon it yet all make but one Image of Caesar All those parts are but the severall sculptures of one and the same entire character of the glorious time of the Church yet before the end of the world for hitherto the said three parties never enjoyed the afore-mentioned three parts
joyntly together but rather for the most have been visibly to the eye of the whole world under a contrary condition For ¶ 4. Observe the high expressions the God of truth gives forth touching the glory of the state the said parties shall enjoy at the said time when this Prophesie shall be fulfilled viz. That the Peoples or Gentiles shall have pure lips wherewith to call upon the name of the Lord as it is in ver 9. That Israel shall not doe iniquity nor speake lies nor shall a deceitfull tongue be found in their mouth ver 13. That they of Zion and Jerusalem and Israel shall be glad and rejoyce with all their heart ver 14. for it followes ver 15 16 17. the Lord shall so take away their judgements and cast downe their enemies and instead of them he himselfe as King will be so in the midst of them that they shall not see evill any more nor shall their hearts feare nor their hands faint He will be so in the midst of them in his might that he will save them and rejoyce over them with joy and that as with singing and will rest in his love Now did ever these things appeare in the state and condition of the Church either of Jewes or Gentiles since the Babylonish Captivity surely the contrary hath abundantly appeared down to these dayes 1 For their Spirituall or Ecclesiasticall state in relation unto Religion the Gentiles generally have been very wicked and for the most part the more is their sinne intestine enemies to the Jewes And for the Jewes whiles the ten Tribes of Israel were carried away captive the King of Assyria brought men from Babylon and from Cuthah and from Ava and from Hamath and from Sepharvalin and placed them in the Cities of Samaria instead of the Children of Israel 2 King 17.24 of whose returne to their owne Country the Scriptures leave no mention But they tell us that when the two Tribes returned there was a MIXED MVLTITVDE among the Israelites Nehem. 13.3 That there were many that pretended to be Priests who because they could not find their Genealogy were as POLLUTED put from the Priesthood Ezra 2.62 Nehem. 7.64 That the people of Israel and the Priests and the Levites had not separated themselves from the people of the land doing according to their ABOMINATIONS even of the Canaanites Hitties Perezites Jebusites Ammonites Moabites Egyptians and Amorites having taken of their Daughters for themselves and for their Sons c. Ezr. 9.1 2. And though they did repent of this great transgression and promised amendment Ezr. 10.9 c. Yet they are again greatly guilty thereof Neh. 13.23 Further the Scriptures tell us that some of the two Tribes of a slavish spirit stayed in Babylon to be servants in servile basenesse to that King when the generality returned 1 Chro. 4.21 22 23. which Josephus mentions at large And in the time of the Maccabees in the time of Antiochus Epiphanes of the root of the Greeks who began his reigne about the 137th yeare of their Kingdome * Which was in the one hundred seventy third year afore the incarnation of Christ Bucho Ind. Chron. Ad annum mundi 3798. or Empâre there went out of Israel wicked men who persuaded many saying let us goe and make a covenant with the Heathen that are round about us for since we departed from them we have had much sorrow So this device pleased them well Then certain of the people were so forward herein that they went to the King who gave them license to doe after the ordinances of the Heathen Whereupon they built a place of exercise at Jerusalem according to the customes of the Heathen and made themselves uncircumcised and forsooke the holy Covenant and joyned themselves to the Heathen and were sold to doe mischeife 1 Maccab. 1.10 11 12 13 14 15. Which corruption in the Jewes religion by the story seems to be voluntary as the Narrative precedes the history of Antiothus his Tyranny Nor was this only for once or a spurt but againe in the second book of Maccabees together with betraying one another and the publick welfare chap. 3 and chap 4. Come we hence to Christs time and there we shall finde at least six Sects of abominable corruptions in matters of Religion viz. Pharisees Sadduces Herodians Assideans Essenes and Gaulonites of whose wicked opinions wee have given you a more particular account afore * Viz. In this chap. Sect. 43. §. 4. P. 2. In the Apostles time the Jewes for the generality were persecuters of them that imbraced Christ and the Gospell as we have it all along the story of the Acts of the Apostles and among the Christians there were Anti-resurrectionists Judaizers wicked Apostataes Idolatrous and prophane Balaamites and Nicolaitans c. as the Epistles of the Apostles and of Christ to the seven Churches expressely shews us For the two next hundred years after the death of the Apostles was bloody persecution of the Christians over all the Roman Empire About the twelfth year of the fourth Century Constantine the great stanched that blood and settled the Church in peace for the space of about twenty five years viz. till the year three hundred thirty seven at which time Constantine the great dying by and by horrid Arianism and the Arian persecution succeeded And after that Papisme and Turcisme down to our daies So that fâom about sixty yeares after Constantines death the Church began according to the vulgar account to be hid in the wildernesse the witnesses to prophesie in sackcloth and the Beast to have power ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Rev. 11. Rev. 13. And secondly for their civil condition all this while they have been ever under the usurpations successively of the Persians Greeks Romans Saracens or Turkes as we have often repeated So that all that hath been done in matters of salvation or outward deliverance since the returne of the two Tribes from Babylon the ten remaining there and still dispersed have been but as prefaces first-fruits and gleanings in comparison of the full vintage here described ¶ 5. Observe certaine notes and marks that this prophesie is not yet fulfilled First That ver 9. The peoples or Nations shall serve the Lord with one shoulder which in regard of the universality without restriction and the immediate connexion of Gods Suppliants of the Jewes as Calvin argumentatively asserts must signifie the unanimity and conformity of Jewes and Gentiles in general in one way of Gospell worship But alas besides the Jewes perseverance in their Judaisme the Gentiles themselves called Christians doe not harmonize into one consent and practice but are at too vast a difference in their Papisme Lutheranisme Socinianisme Calvinisme Episcopacy Presbytery c. Secondly That in ver 10. the calling of the Jews from beyond the river of Ethiopia which is not yet done the people of Judah but especially they of Israel remaining dispersed into the utmost parts of the earth Thirdly
That v. 11. and v. 19. Their shame shall be taken away and they shall be made a name and a praise in all lands where they have been put to shame and all they that afflicted them shall be undone Instead whereof the Iews in all lands are under great reproach and contempt and their enemies rather undo them then that their enemies are undone for their sakes Thus of Zephany SECT XLV § 1 NExt we come to the Prophet Zechary who prophesied within two months at the same time that Haggy prophesied Hag. 1.1 Zech. 1.1 and therefore is commonly accounted as a co-partner with Haggy Both prophesying after Judah's return from Babylon in the second yeare of Darius sonne of Histaspis For Haggai reproves them chap. 1. ver 2. for not re-building the Temple And v. 6. declares that the scarcity upon them was for that neglect Neither of which could have been rationall if they had been then in Babylon Zechariah likewise hints the same time in chap. 1. ver 6. in acknowledging that God had then fulfilled the judgement threatned upon them And expressely in the 16 verse saith The Lord is returned to Jerusalem with mercies and his house shall be built § 2 These being premised the first place we pitch upon in this Prophet is chap. 2. ver 6. c. to the end of the chapter Ver. 6. Ho ho come forth and flee from the land of the North saith the Lord. For I have spread you abroad as the four winds of the Heaven saith the Lord. Vers 7. Deliver thy selfe O Zion that dwellest with the daughter of Babylon Vers 8. For thus saith the Lord of Hosts After the glory hath he sent me unto the Nations which spoiled you for he that toucheth you toucheth the apple of his eye Ver. 9. For behold I will shake mine hand upon them and they shall be a spoile to their servants and yee shall know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me Sing and rejoyce O Daughter of Zion for lo I come and I will dwell in the midst of thee saith the Lord. Ver. 11. And MANY NATIONS SHALL BE JOYNED UNTO THE LORD in that day and shall be my people c. Vers 12. And the Lord shall inherit Judah his portion in the holy land and shall chuse Ierusalem againe Of which words the introduction preceding in the § 1. leades us into this sence that they look beyond the two Tribes called Iudah unto the returne of the ten Tribes called Isreal § 3 It hath been often very grievous in my eyes to see how Authours commonly follow one another in expounding Scripture as if they were rather led by humain example then by divine reason And let this goe for one instance where they successively vote or dictate not demonstrate that that great call to the Jewes in ver 6. To come forth and flee from the land of the North c. relates to those of the two Tribes that tarryed behind when the rest of them returned I confesse as to wipe off singularity I am glad of the bare company in opinion of them that are learned but I had rather have one of their reasons if they give any then an hundred of their names Oecolampadius speaking for us saith Terram Aquilonis c. that is the Prophet calls Babylon the land of the North which is situated towards the Northern part Eastwardly And seeing that others were dispersed into divers parts of the earth according to the foure winds and others oppressed with other servitude all that are burdened are called c. And Pellican likewise voting for us saith the Prophet here foretels a double gathering of the Inhabitants and cals unto them for the dispersion of the faithfull was two-fold one of the people of Iudah in Babylon who are called together with Nehemiah unto the building of Ierusalem whom the Prophet exhorts to goe forth out of the province of the Babylonians and to beleeve the word of God and to restore the divine worship in the Temple The other was greater and more general of all Israel whom God had scattered into the foure quarters or climates of the world All which the prophet cals and desires to be congregated toward Zion c. But to leave men and words and come to reason ¶ 1. T is clear that this place of Scripture is a prophesie of future things by the language of it speaking all along from the fourth verse to the end of the chapter in the future tense that these and those things shall come to passe and such things and so God will do ¶ 2. And the exhortation in the sixt verse the thing in controversie is expresly there extended not only unto the Jews in the North viz. Babylon but to all of them dispersed in the foure quarters of the world as they are to this day Where marke the connexion For I will gather you from the four winds making this the meaning of coming out of the North. Compare also Zech. 8.7 a considerable place viz. Thus saith the Lord of Hosts behold I will save my people from the East Country and from the West Country and I will bring them and they shall dwell in the midst of Jerusalem Accordingly the Septuagint reads this of Zech. 2.6 thus Ω ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã i. e. Ho ho fly from the land of the North saith the Lord Because I WILL GATHER you from the foure winds of Heaven saith the Lord. ¶ 3. The said two Tribes had been even now when Zechariah preached this Sermon returned from Babylon into Iudea near this sixteen years For as the best Chronologers cast up the account they returned from Babylon in the year of the world 3435. And Zechary began his prophesie in the year of the world three thousand foure hundred fifty one A faire time for the most of the Jewes of the two Tribes to take heart to returne that are mentioned in the beginning of their deliverance by Cyrus to have lingered behind the rest 1 Chron. 4. if feare of the Kings sincerity in dismissing them had remorated them and to have been incouraged by their fore-runners prosperity in Iudea if any considerable number staid in Babylon for feare of successe And therefore doubtlesse by this time most of the people of Iudah were returned Iosephus boldly affirmeth * and Sanctius approves the account that there returned of the Tribes of Iudah and Benjamin forty six hundred thousand Lib. 11. Cap. 4 and twenty eight thousand which may appear to have some truth in it if we compare Ezr. 2.61 62 63 64 65. and Nehem. 13.3 And truly the great work they did in re-building the Temple repairing the City wals and their bountifull offerings at the dedication speake aloud that they were a very numerous people And therefore t is very unlikely that the Prophet in that exhortation verse the sixt should mainly mind a gleaning of a few lingerers in Babylon ¶ 4. This exhortation ver the sixt calling for separation and to
come out of Babylon is carryed downe by the Apostles unto the latter if not to the last times of this world For St. Paul in the 2 Cor. 6.17 18 brings it down to his time which is far beyond any occurrences in Zecharies time who prophesied five hundred and eighteen yeares plus minus thereabouts afore Christs birth And Paul pens this Epistle at least fifty two years after the birth of Christ for about that year he wrote his first Epistle to Corinth his words are these Come out from among them and be yee separate SAITH THE LORD marke his quotation of the old Testament c. and I will receive you and be a father unto you Just to the same effect as Zecharie in the said sixt verse Come forth flee from the land of the North c. Deliver thy selfe O Zion that dwellest with the daughter of Babylon c. Lo I come and I will dwell in the midst of thee saith the Lord. Thus far St. Paul extends it But St. Iohn Revel cha 18. ver 2 3 4. extends it much further and that in a propheticall way viz. to the time nearly preceding the fall of Babylon I saw another Angell come down from Heaven having great power c. and he cryed mightily with a strong voyce saying Babylon the great is fallen is fallen c. i.e. shall surely fal And I heard another voice from heaven saying come out of her my people that yee be not partakers of her sins and that yee receive not of her plagues Which two last clauses being of a future tense and sence clearly shew that is fallen is fallen signifies it shall fall and that in regard thereof the people of God must timously come out thence ¶ 5. There are high straines annexed to this prophesie in this second of Zecharie which effectually evince that it is not yet fulfilled as that ver 5. I saith the Lord will be unto her a wall of fire round about and will be the glory in the midst of her That is a fence about the Church consisting of Jewes and Gentiles of absolute defence to them and of a devouring offence to the enemy And that ver 8 9. Thus saith the Lord after the glory hath he sent me to the Nations which spoiled you For he that toucheth you toucheth the apple of mine eye For behold I will shake mine hand upon them and they shall be a spoile to their servants And yee shall know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me That is after this glory of your famous return and rebuilt Temple the Lord hath sent me the Messiah to the Nations that spoiled you that is to your enemies who in touching you to hurt you did as it were thrust their fingers into mine eyes Therefore I the Messiah will shake mine hands upon them as Psal 2.9 To break them with a rod of iron and so to make them a spoile to their servants that is to you whom they rigidly made their servants Lastly that in vers 10 11 12 13. Sing and rejoyce O daughter of ZION for lo I come and I will dwell in the midst of THEE saith the Lord. And many NATIONS shall be joyned to the Lord in that day and SHALL BEE MY PEOPLE and I will dwell in the midst of THEE and thou shalt know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me unto thee And the Lord shall inherit Judah in the HOLY LAND and shall chuse Jerusalem AGAINE Be silent O all flesh before the Lord Because he is awakened concerning the habitation of his holinesse ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã That is a joyfull time is yet to come when the Messiah shall dwell in the midst of the Jewes they dwelling in the holy Land many Nations being joyned unto the Lord together with the Jewes into one Church he dwelling in the midst of them all for dwelling in the midst is againe repeated so that then they shall effectually know not only that this Prophet was sent of God to preach this to them but also that the true Messiah shall be at the appointed time sent to performe these things to them to the putting of all fleshly and carnall minds to silence that doubted or disputed against these thing I say to put them to silence by the appearance of Christ awakened and bestirring himselfe in the behalfe of his holy habitation or the habitation of his holinesse that is the Church in her pure state and worship Now when were these high straines these sublime expressions ever yet fulfilled We have a watch-word in the twelfth verse that we must looke for the impletion âhereof far beyond Zecharies time For though he in his time of this Prophesie saw the returne of the Jews into the holy Land yet saith The Lord SHALL inherit Judah his portion in the HOLY LAND and SHALL chuse Jerusalem AGAINE Surely if wee keep the prophesie together as the Lord hath laid it and left it together there was never yet to this day since their return from Babylon that time and state of the Church that is here limbed forth to the life viz. that the Church should consist of Jews and Gentiles joyned to the Lord and owned by him as his people even while the Jewes possesse the holy Land and the Lord should be as a wall of fire protecting them and devouring their enemies and making the Jewes of servants to the cruell Heathens to be the spoilers of them c. and all these things to be carryed up to that height of glory that all spirituall hearts should sing and rejoyce and all fleshly hearts should bee struck dumb or astonished with silence We have before repeated usque ad nauseam foriè aliquibus very often how the Jewes ever since the return of the two Tribes have been little lesse or otherwise then in a captive condition under three Monarchies that when the Jewes a few of them imbraced Christ Acts second third and fourth chapters the Gentiles were not converted When the Gentiles began to be called the Jewes fell off Act. 13. Rom. 11. That the Maccabean conflict in regard of the catastrophe and event is not worthy to be named with this Prophesie And therefore this Prophesie is yet unfulfilled and requires by the circumstances of it a time of fulfilling before the ultimate universall resurrection SECT XLVI THe second place in Zecharie is in chap. 6. ver 13 13 14 15. which I need little more then name V. 12. Thus speaketh the Lord of Hosts saying behold the man whose name is the BRANCH and he shall grow up out of his place and HE shall BUILD THE TEMPLE of the Lord. 13. Even HEE shall build THE TEMPLE OF THE LORD and he shall bear the glory and shall sit and RULE UPON HIS THRONE and he shall be a PRIEST upon his throne and the COUNSILL OF PEACE shall be between them both 14. And the Crowns shall be to Heâem and to Toâijah and to Jedajah and to Hen the son of Zephaniaâ for a
memorial in the temple of the Lord. 15. And they that ARE FAR OFF shall come and build in the temple of the Lord. Though this second Temple was long since founded and by this time in great part raised chap. 8. ver 9. and the carrying on of the work to a finishing by sufficient and able men was now in hand yet the Prophet here foretells that the man whose name is the BRANCH the usuall and frequent title of Christ shall BUILD the TEMPLE of the Lord in vers 12. And presently againe repeated with great Emphasis in ver 13. EVEN HEE shall build the temple of the Lord. And therefore the Prophet in these words looked far beyond his owne time Christ builds the Temple first in his natural body secondly in his mysticall subordinates are no opposites but doe ray forth a typicall radiation from the one successively to the other First In his natural body by his resurrection according to his owne exposition John 2.18 19 20. When his adversaries demanded of him What sign shewest thou unto us seeing thou dost these things Jesus answered destroy this Temple and in three daies I will raise it up Then said the Jewes forty and six years was this Temple in building and wilt thou rear it up in three daies But he spake of the Temple of his body Secondly In his Mysticall body the Church of beleevers By communicating unto whom his holy Spirit he makes them his Temple and the habitation of God 1 Cor. 6.15 16 17 18 19. And 2 Cor. 6.16 Eph. 2.21 22. This mysticall Temple was founded long since but the Prophet here points mainly to the finishing of it Or to speake in a juster proportion to the first and second materiall Temple The first mysticall Temple that is the Church of the Jewes being destroyed at Christs passion the vaile then being rent to signifie the tearing down of Jewish worship upon his ascension by sending the Spirit hee began the building of the second mysticall Temple viz. the Christian Church Act. 2. c. and throughout that booke But when this second mystical Temple shall be finished made up in its fulnesse Rom. 11.25 26. of which St. John mainly prophesies in his Revelation of which finishing Zecharie here in ver 15. gives us this signe That THEN they that ARE AFAR OFF shall come and build in the Temple Which can have no other adequate and more certaine interpretation then this that when the Gentiles that are afar off in Religion shall in full come in and the ten Tribes of Israel that are to this day afar off in place too shall come and be built into the Christian Church at that same THEN even at that very time the BRANCH Christ that built this second mysticall Temple shall SIT and RULE upon his THRONE and he shall be a Priest upon his Throne and the Counsil of Peace shall be between them both That is as Christ hath sensibly appeared in acting his Priesthood when hee paid and prayed for his Church at and afore his Passion * In the 17 18 and 19 chapters of John so shall he as manifestly be seen to act his Kingly-hood in a glorious universall evident peace flowing from both in the time of his Kingdome Else nothing is prophesied for meer inward spirituall peace into the hearts of the Saints had flowed in all ages of the Church afore from his Kingly and Priestly office precisely considered as spirituall and the Saints knew it upon much experience But here is prophesied such things and such effects as many of the Church could hardly beleeve And therefore there should be crownes to Helem and Tabijah and Jedajah and to Hen for a memoriall in the Temple i. e. They should be in Zecharies time hung up in the Temple to be a conviction and condemnation of them that beleeved not this Prophesie and to draw men unto faith to beleeve the same as Calvin Pemble and Junius expound it But these things were never yet fulfilled as History and experience shew And the last universall resurrection will be unseasonable and unsuitable Therefore it is yet to come SECT XLVII § I THe third place in Zecharie which we need but touch is in chap. 8. ver 20. c. to the end of the chapter Ver. 20. Thus saith the Lord of Hosts it shall yet come to passe that there shall come people * Heb. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Chal. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is Peoples Sept. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Many peoples And so t is expresse in v. 22. and the inhabitants of many Cities 21. And the Inhabitants of one City shall goe to another saying let us goe speedily to pray before the Lord and to seeke the Lord of Hosts I wil goe also 22. Yea many people and strong Nations shall come to seeke the Lord of Hosts in Jerusalem and to pray before the Lord. 23. Thus saith the Lord of Hosts in those daies it shall come to passe that ten men shal take hold out of all languages of the Nations even shall take hold of the skirt of him that is a Jew saying we wil goe with you for wee have heard that God is with you § 2 There is no more to be said to this so plaine a prophesie but this that we shall boldly assert that it was never yet fulfilled since the Jewes returne from captivity till men or bookes can shew us the contrary The Scriptures tels us no such thing History tels us no such thing experience shewes us no such matter as that peoples yea many peoples yea and strong Nations did ever joyne with the Jewes in religious worship as in prayer to God c. and that at Jerusalem As for those mentioned Act. 2.5 c. viz Parthians Medes Elamites c. They were neither Nations nor Gentiles but were some certaine Jewes who having been borne in those forenamed Countries did now for the present sojourne * So the word in the Text. from ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã and ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã is used by the Septuagint which the Apostles and Evangelists much follow in their new Testament quotations Gen. 27.44 Son arise saith Rebecka to Jacob and flee unto Laban thy Brother to Haran and ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã and sojourne with him a few dayes 1 King 17.20 O Lord my God saith Elijah hast thou brought evill upon the widdow ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã that is with whom I sojourne In which places the word is plainly taken for sojourning and accordingly circumscribed with a short time at Jerusalem for the businesse of worship at the feast of the Passeover and Pentecost Thus in this fifth verse they are expressely called Jews There were sojourning or abiding at Jerusalem JEWS of every Nation under Heaven Ver. 22. when Peter spake to them he saith to them Yee men of ISRAEL And that none put this off with an imagination that they were Proselytes that is Gentiles converted to Judaisme let them heed that Proselytes
did at first when he overthrew Amalech and Og c. as the Iews approached near Canaan Surely we have had a sad account to the contrary in the very next preceding Section § 4. in a short but full Chronology from Zecharie to this very day And a meer spirituall notion will not help us out seeing the Text expounds it selfe That the Lord will goe out and fight against the Nations that spoile Jerusalem how or in what manner As he fought at first when the Iewes approached Canaan or to keep to our common translation as when he fought in the day of battle Which exposition needed not to be added if a spirituall sence had been mainly intended Which if it were yet that is not to this day fulfilled that the enemies of Jerusalem are either converted by grace or confounded in hell § 3 T is true that as not any Prophesie hardly so nor is this likely without some allegory But to convert all into a spirituall sence seemes to me impossible without selfe-contradiction or contradicting the Text. For how can we presume upon a spirituall sence when it is said ver 4. HIS FEET shal stand upon the MOUNT of Olives which is before Jerusalem on the East c. which shall cleave in the midst And ver 5. Yee shall flee to the VALLEY OF THE MOUNTAINS which shall reach to Azal c. as yee fled from the EARTHQUAKE in the daies of Uzziah and the Lord shall come and ALL HIS SAINTS with him Or how can that be taken in a spirituall sence in ver 7. That there shall be a distinct ONE day and knowne to the Lord that shall not be day nor night but the evening shall be light Surely if the light of the time of the Gospell must bemeant as some will it is no distinct time nor one measured day of a round number of years be it of few or many for it hath been now above one thousand six hundred and twenty years since the first preaching of Christ continued to this day which hath been as well known to us as to the Lord And how should that in ver 9. be comelily and compleatly cloathed and covered with a meer spirituall notion That the Lord SHALL be King OVER ALL the earth And at THAT day he must be the one and onely Lord and his name one For the Lord from the beginning hath been King of power and King of grace secretly ordering and sanctifying whom and wheresoever he listed over the face of the earth Therefore this same shal must import his yet future visible Monarchy before which all must so fall down that they cast away all their Idols seeming Deities and different formes of worship and adore him alone with one uniforme way of worship according to his will which thing to this day is desired being never yet injoyed And as difficult it is if not impossible with cleare reason to fasten a spirituall sence upon the rest of the chapter That all the Land shall be turned or compassed AS A plaine pervious and profitable for habitation FROM GEBA TO RIMMON SOUTH OF JERUSALEM So that it shall be lifted up or exalted in the opinion of men and inhabited in her place FROM BENJAMINS GATE unto the place of the FIRST GATE unto the CORNER GATE and from the Tower of HANANIEL unto the KINGS WINE PRESSES And men shall dwel in it and there shall be NO MORE utter destruction but Jerusalem shal be SAFELY inhabited And this shall be the plague wherewith the Lord will smite all the people that fight against Jerusalem THEIR FLESH SHALL CONSUME AWAY WHILE THEY STAND UPON THEIR FEET and their EYES SHALL CONSUME AWAY IN THEIR HOLES c. And so shall be the plague of the HORSE of the MULE of the CAMEL of the ASSE and of all the BEASTS that shall be in these Tents as THIS PLAGUE âoo wonderfull and industrious a circumstantiating of all places plague things c. to signifie meer spirituals § 4 Men may phantasie to themselves a satisfaction that spirituals are here meant because of the next verse that the residue of the Nations that came up against Ierusalem that is left shall go up from year to year to worship the Lord to keep the feast of Tabernacles But we did before give a rule and proved it that even in the Old Testament as wel as in the New the most Gospel Truths are sometimes cloathed with Jewish language and Leviticall phrases * Lib. 3. Cha. 2. Sect 44. §. 2. P. 330. See also Just Martyrs excellent Note in this third Book Chap. 3. Sect. 2. S. 3. and P. 2. Nor indeed is there any Gospell expression scarcely in all the New Testament that is not dressed forth with one or more Tropes and figures As Come to me all yee that are weary and heavy laden c. Matth. 11. And a bruised reed he shall not breake c. Matth. 12. Christ being no Porter nor Christians reeds in a literall sence Beside for the words of Zecharie themselves there is no more exprest but goe up and once a year and at the feast of Tabernacles as to signifie our deliverance from the Egypt of the world as Israel going out of Topal Egypt first pitched in Succoth that is Boothes And in memorial of that deliverance praised God yearly in the feast of Boothes As we hereafter shall often congratulate our LORD with HALELUJAHS for our deliverance from the Egyptian world frequently prophesied in the Revelation To this day we pray in hope but then when the great restauration of the Church and Restitution of all things is come we shall praise with joy And whoever will not shall be plagued with temporall plagues ver 17 c. For all that then will exist in peace must be holinesse to the Lord they and their imjoyments ver 20. § 5 If all those aforesaid Material expressions and corporal circumstances will not awaken some men but they will fall asleep and dream pleasant dreams of all figurative meanings and will not sensibly see the visible glory here prophesied then I would entreat them to tell us their dreams from point to point upon every Verse when all Nations obstinately at enmity with the Jews were spiritually destroyed when the rest that came in to close with them did joyntly with them own the LORD as King over all the Earth in one way of worship when was Jerusalem safely inhabited as free from spiritual evils And how could the Horse and the Mule and the Camel and the Ass and all Beasts be spiritually plagued § 6 There is but one thing more that I will adde and that is this That those of the Learned that have gone about to squeeze out of this Text a spiritual meaning have I know not how been forced to let fall from them many considerable passages for a literal sence A Lapide applauds Jerom for his spiritual interpretation of this prophesie Quocirca verè S. Hieron hic ad vers 11.
haec inquit c. that is Therefore Jerom saith truly upon the eleventh verse the Jews and our Chiliasts dream these things shall be literally performed but let us interpret Jerusalem to be the Church which walking in the flesh yet doth not live according to the flesh whose freedom is in Heaven c. So he and yet within a very few lines after the same A Lapide hath these words Dico ergo c. that is I say therefore according to the Letter it is here signified that Jerusalem is to be taken by Antiochus Epiphanes and to be restored by the Maccabees Which how untruly it is asserted we have afore demonstrated onely we alleage this to instance how A Lapide falls from his spiritual to a litteral sence Mr. Calvin whiles mighty much for a spiritual sence of this prophesie hath to this effect on those words in the third verse The Lord shall go forth and fight against those Nations as he fought in the day of battel Zechary saith he tells the Jews Certamen saepe vobis fuit c. i.e. You have often fought with the strongest enemies they have been conquered and that when you have been by far unequal in number and power Seeing therefore the Lord hath so often and so many ways cast down your enemies why shall ye not hope for the same thing from him So he Our new Annotations have many touches of a spiritual sence but many also for a literal expresly or implicitly On the second verse this Here the last destruction of Jerusalem seems more plainly described then afore On the third verse this As when he fought in the day of battel that is not slightly but earnestly as he did for Gideon and divers others Judg. 7.22 On ver the fourth Gods coming to defend his Church shal be conspicuous and glorious On ver the fift the very Jews themselves shall be afraid at the presence of Gods appearance It were needlesly tedious to recite the many passages more they have to the same effect though they are very considerable to our purpose seeing the Reader knows where to finde them SECT LI. § 1 FRom Zechary we come to Malachi where we will consider but one place viz. Chapter 4. but that throughout verse 1. For behold the day cometh that shall burn as an oven and all the proud yea and all that do wickedly shall be stubble and the day that cometh shall burn them up saith the Lord of Hosts that it shall leave them neither root nor branch Vers 2. But unto you that fear my name shall the Sun of Righteousness arise with healing in his wings and ye shall go forth and grow up as calves of the stall Vers 3. And ye shall tread down the wicked for they shall be ashes under the soles of your feet in the day I shall do this saith the Lord of Hosts Vers 4. Remember the Law of Moses my servant which I commanded unto him in Horeb for all Israel with the statutes and judgements Vers 5. Behold I will send you Elijah the Prophet before the coming of the great and dreadful day of the Lord Vers 6. And be shall turn the heart of the Fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers least I come and smite the Earth with a curse § 2 There are so many famous Authors both Ancient and Modern that understand this Chapter of the second coming of Christ as you may see in the Margent * Paties Graeci Latini Cyril Theodor. Remig. Haymo Albert. Hugo Lyra. Chrysostom Euthym. Beda Anselm Hippol lib. de Consum sâculi Cyprâ tract de Sina Sion Ephrem tract de Antich Prosper in dimidio temp c. 13. Tertul. lib. de anima c. 35. Justin Mart. Dialog contr Tryph. Nyssen lib. Testim contr Judaeos Augustinus 20. Civit. Dei Greg. 11. Moral Andreas Ambros Rupert Arethas in Apocalyp c. 11. Scholastici Thomas in Matth. 17. A Lapid in hoc cap. Malach. c. Translatores Septuag in Anâiq exempl Arab. quorum utrique vertunt Elijam Thesbiten Neoterici Oecolamp M. Mede D. Mayer Sibyllae Tum quoque caelesti curru devectus inibit Terras de caelo Thesbites signaque trina Ostendettoti mundo vitae pereuntis Omnes Judaei communi eorum sententia to the number if we should name all as amounts as Calvin confesseth to the major part that we shall go free from wonder novelty or singularity in holding the same Especially if the Reader will take notice that those that incline to the other interpretation of Christs first coming as Calvin our New Annotations c. do ingenuously confess that the things of this Chapter shall not be compleatly fulfilled till the second coming of Christ Jerom our great adversary though on this Chapter he inveighs against the Jews and Judaizers for their expecting Elijah to come in person yet as A Lapide also hath noted upon Matthew chap. 11. vers 14. chap. 17. ver 11. he clearly teacheth that Elijah must come in person which A Lapide endeavors to reconcile thus Because the Jews do yet expect the first coming of the Messiah and that Elijah in person shall be the fore-runner of that his first coming Therefore Jerom on this Text reproves them but Jerom yeelds that Elijah in person shall be the fore-runner of the Messiahs second coming ** Sunt qui propterea Johannem Heliam votari quod quodam modo IN SECUNDO SALVATORIS ADVENIU JUXTA MALACHIAM PRAECESSURUS EST HELIAS venturum Judicem nunciaturus Sic Iohannes in primo adventu fecerit ET UTERQUE FIT NUNCIUS VEL PRIMI ADVENTUS DOMINI VEL SECUNDI Ierom in Matth. 11.14 Ecce apparuit illis Moyses Elias cum co loquentes Scribis Pharisaeis tentantibus se de caelo signa poscentibus dare noluit sed pravam postulationem conâutavit responsione pindenti Hic vero ut Apostolorum AUGEAT FIDEM DAT SIGNUM DE CAELO Elia inde DESCENDENTE quo conscenderat Moyse ab inferis resurgente âerom on Matth. 17.11 Thus Jerom. For my part I shall endeavor rather to demonstrate then as the manner of most is to dictate what I assert in the matters of this prophesie That this Chapter is of a state of the Church under the New Testament I need not labor much to prove Malachy being the last Prophet of the Old Testament And that V. 2. of this Chapter of the rising of the Sun c. is applyed to Christ John 1.9 Calling him the true light that lightneth every one c. As that V. 5. of this Chapter touching Elijah is applied by Christ Matth. 17.13 in part to signifie John Baptist his harbenger § 3 But the great question is How far into the times of the New Testament this prophesie doth run To answer which lay this for a ground work That the time to which this prophesie doth reach is called the GREAT AND DREADFUL DAY OF THE LORD And it is as
adequatly and answerably to that name described in the first verse to be a day that shall BURN AS AN OVEN which shall burn up the proud and wicked as stubble leaving them neither root nor branch Now observe ¶ 1. This cannot be extended to the ultimate day of judgment at the universal resurrection of all the wicked then cast into the lake of fire Revel 20.12 c. to the end of the Chapter for these Reasons First Because at this day if not according to the order of the prophesie after this dreadful and burning day in this first verse of the fourth of Malachi Christ the Sun of Righteousness shall arise with healing in his wings to them that fear his name and they shall GO FORTH and shall GROW UP AS CALVES OF THE STALL Ver. 2. Now this cannot be at that universal resurrection and ultimate judgement at which time Christ hath done healing hath finished his mediatorship and resigned up all his power to God the Father 1 Cor. 15.24 25 26 27 28. and the elect have done growing Secondly Because ver 5. an Elijah must be sent BEFORE THE COMING of the GREAT and DREADFUL day of the Lord who shall turn the heart of the fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers Which is not a work to be done at or near-upon that ultimate judgement but then he that is unjust let him be unjust still and he that is filthy let him be filthy still then is a time of destruction not of conversion Thirdly Because it is added in the last verse of Malachi That Elijah must come and shall turn the heart of the fathers to the children LEAST the Lord come and SMITE THE EARTH WITH A CURSE Now at the ultimate judgement there is no other smiting and cursing of the Earth but with that judgement it self it swallowing up all other evils And whether all parents or children be converted or not converted that ultimate judgement will be âure to come for the elects sake As concerning who this Elijahs is we shall dispute it particularly by and by ¶ 2. On the other side this prophesie cannot be cut so short as to terminate in Christs first coming For then was no dreadful day of the Lord so burning as a fiery oven to burn up the proud and wicked doers root and branch Christs coming is set forth in Matth. 21.5 according to Isa 62.11 Zech. 9.9 compared with Matth. 11.29 Phil. 2.7 c. in all meekness meanness lowliness and lowness And although there were wonderful days at his incarnation or birth Luke 2. Matth. 2. at his passion Matth. 27. his resurrection Matth. 28.1 2 3 4. at his ascension Acts 1. and at his mission of the Spirit Acts 2. Yet these were not THE great and dreadful day in the singular number they being many Or if we call them DREADFUL especially that of the resurrection and passion yet these days destroyed none For it is observable what Christ saith He came to heal or help not to destroy And therefore though he cursed the fig-tree to warn men yet with all his power and miracles he never killed or crippled any man being infinitely injured he revenged not but rather healed Malchus and his enemies wounds and maladies Yet see by this time how streightly and strongly we are butted and bounded with these two Paragraphs that we cannot fall so short as Christs first coming nor launch forth so far as to the universal resurrection of all the wicked at the ultimate judgement § 5 Now therefore to answer the question distinctly when this time is We assert That no time can shape and correspond to the circumstances and characters of this prophesie but the time abutting upon the beginning entrance or prelude of the whole day of judgement containing a thousand years as Peter speaks 2 Pet. 3. and bounded out exactly Revel 20. with two physical or corporal resurrections as we have before amply opened * Book 1. Cap. 2. Sect. 1 2 3 4. This we shall endeavor to demonstrate by these Arguments ¶ 1. That burning of all the proud and of all evil doers as stubble leaving them neither root nor branch Ver. 1. And that trampling them under the feet of the Saints as ashes Ver. 3. must rather be referred to such a time set down in the Scriptures as most aptly answer to those particulars then left at random to the imaginary times in mens brains of which we never read nor heard to agree to their character But these things do most harmoniously concord with the times of the last ruining of the Antichristian enemies of the Church before the raising of it to her great restauration and restitution of all things Rev. 18. wholly and Rev. 19.11 to the end of the chapter compared with Rev. 20.1 2 3 4 5. Therefore thither are these things to be referred I hope the very setting down of the words will convince the ingenuous Reader where after a large and particular description with all manner of corporal circumstances of the BURNING of Babylon Rev. 18. There follows alike iconism or corporal characterism of the ruine of the rest of the Churches enemies by fire and sword Chap. 19. I saw Heaven opened and behold a white horse and he that sate upon him was called Faithful and True in righteousness he doth judge and MAKE WAR His eyes were as a FLAME OF FIRE c. and he was clothed with a vesture DIPT IN BLOOD c. And the ARMIES which were in Heaven followed him upon white horses c. And out of his mouth goeth a sharp sword that with it he should smite the Nations And he shall RULE them with a ROD OF IRON and he treadeth the wine press of the fierceness of the WRATH OF ALMIGHTY GOD and he hath on his vesture and on his thigh a name written KING OF KINGS AND LORD OF LORDS And I saw another Angel standing in the Sun and he cryed with a loud voyce saying to all the FOWLS that flie in the midst of Heaven Come and gather your selves together unto the SUPPER of the Great God that ye may eat the FLESH of KINGS and the FLESH of CAPTAINS and the FLESH of MIGHTY MEN and the FLESH of HORSES and of them that sit on them and the FLESH of ALL MEN both free and bond both small and great And I saw the BEAST and the KINGS of the Earth and their ARMIES gathered together to make WAR against him that sate on the horse and against his ARMY And the BEAST was taken and with him the false Prophet c. these both were cast alive into the lake of fire burning with brimstone And the REMNANT were SLAIN and all the fouls were filled with their flesh And I saw an Angell come down from Heaven having the keyes of the bottomlesse pit and a great chain in his hand and he laid hold on the Dragon c. which is the Devil and bound him a THOUSAND YEARS And cast him
second coming as John Baptist was at his first For to the Jews alone is this Elias promised and not to the Gentiles and John Baptist wee know the Elias of his first coming preached to them alone It is well known that all the Fathers unlesse S. Hierome somewhat staggered were of this opinion and why we should so wholly reject it as we are wont to do I can see no sufficient reason For if the Fathers erred concerning the person and other circumstances of this Elias yet it follows not but the substance of their opinion might bee true As we know also they erred concerning the person quality and reign of Antichrist and yet for the substance the thing was true Our Saviour rejected not the tradition of the Scribes concerning the coming of this Elias when the Apostles objected it though it were mingled with some falshood but corrected it onely for they looked for Elias the Thisbite but our Saviour admits it only of Elias in Spirit not of Elias in person so yeelding it true for the substance though erring in circumstance so should we doe in the like case For hee that throwes away what he findes because t is foule and dirty may perchance sometimes cast away a Jewell or a peece of gold or silver so hee that wholly rejects an ancient Tenet because it hath some errour annexed to it may unawares cast away a Truth as this seemes to be of an Elias to be the Harbinger of Christs second comming And that for these reasons First Though the prophecy of Esaias The voice of one crying in the wildernesse prepare yee the way of the Lord make his paths straight alledged by all the four Evangelists and by John himselfe seems appliable onely to the first coming of Christ yet the other out of Malachi expresly quoted by St. Marke and by our Saviour Mat. 11 though elsewhere alluded unto seemes by Malachi himself to be applyed not onely to the first coming of Christ but also to his second coming to judgement For in his last chapter speaking of the coming of that day which shall burne like an oven wherein all the pround yea and all that doe wickedly shall be as stubble and it shall burne them up leaving neither root nor branch c. he addeth Behold saith the Lord I will send you Elijah the Prophet before the coming of that great and terrible day of the Lord and he shall turn or restore the heart of the fathers to their children and the heart of the children to their fathers lest I come and smite the earth with a curse If you wil not admit the day here described to be the day of judgement I know scarce any description of that day in the old Testament but we may elude For the phrase of turning or as I had rather translate it restoring as the LXX ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the heart of the fathers to the children and the heart of the children to their fathers the meaning is that this Elias should bring the refractary and unbeleeving posterity of the Jewish nation to have the same heart and mind their holy Fathers and Progenitors had who feared God and beleeved his promises that so their Fathers might as it were rejoyce in them and own them for their children that is he should convert them to the faith of that Christ whom their Fathers hoped in and looked for lest continuing obstinate in their unbeliefe till the great day of Christs second coming they might perish among the rest of the enemies of his kingdome Therefore the Son of Syrach in his praise of Elias the This bite paraphraseth this place after this manner who wa st ordained saith he an ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã or type for so it may bee turned for the times to come to pacifie the wrath of the Lords judgement before it breake forth into fury and to turne the heart of the Father unto the Son and to restore the tribes of Israel Eccles 48.10 which explication also the Angel warranteth Luke 1.17 in his message to Zachary concerning his sonne He shall goe saith he before the Lord in the spirit and power of Elias to turne the hearts of the Fathers to the children and the disobedient to the wisdome of the just this is instead of reducing the hearts of the children to the Fathers to make ready a people prepared for the Lord. For the better understanding of this first reason we must know that the old Prophets for the most part spake of the coming of Christ indefinitely and in generall without that distinction of first and second coming which we have more clearly learned in the Gospel For this reason those Prophets except Daniel who distinguisheth those comings and the Gospel out of him that speake of the things which should be at the coming of Christ indefinitely and all together we who are now more fully informed by the revelation of his Gospel of this distinction of a two-fold coming must apply each of them to its proper time Those things which befit the state of his first coming unto it and such things as befit the state of his second coming unto his second And that which befits both alike as this of an Harbinger or Messenger may be applyed to both My second reason for the proofe hereof is from our Saviours own words in the Gospel Mat. 17.10 11. where his Disciples immediatly upon his transfiguration asking him saying Why then say the Scribes that Elias must first come Our Saviour answers Elias truly shall first come ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã and shall restore all things These words our Saviour spake when John Baptist was now beheaded and yet speakes as of a thing future ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Elias shall come and shall restore all things How can this be spoken of John Baptist unlesse he be to come again Besides I cannot see how this restoring of all things can be verified of the ministery of John Baptist at the first coming of Christ which continued but a very short time and did no such thing as these words seeme to imply for the restoring of all things belongs not to the first but to the second coming of Christ if we will beleeve St. Peter in his first Sermon in the Temple after Christs ascension Acts 3.19 where he thus speakes unto the Jewes Repent saith he and bee converted for the blotting out of your sins that the times of refreshing may come from the presence of the Lord and that he may send Jesus Christ which before was preached unto you whom the heavens must receive untill the times of the restitution of all things which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy Prophets since the world began The word is the same ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã If the time of restoring all things be not til the second coming of Christ how could John Baptist restore all things as his first If the Master come not to restore all things at his first surely his harbinger
in opposition to both sorts of evils immediately afore recounted viz. not only to false Doctrines but to cruell persecutions and therefore a corporal as well as a spiritual salvation must be here meant and these to be performed on earth viz. in the inhabited world just where the Gospel preached converted them and where they endured to the end And unto which Christ doth gloriously appear FROM heaven ver 30 c. to make up the splendor of that state on earth we here speak of Now all these things cannot be fulfilled at the ultimate generall judgement nor are they hitherto fulfilled and therefore they remaine yet to be fulfilled which Mr. Mede solidly amplifies on Jer. 10. ver 11. thus Hitherto saith he we have spoken of the accomplishment of this prophecy for so much as is already past now let us see what that is which we expect as yet to come for though in regard of former times when Ethnicisme was so large and the worshipers of the living God so small a scantling the extent of the Church be now at this day a goodly and large portion of the world yet if we consider the number of Nations yet Pagans or not Christians it will seem too scant as yet to be the accomplishment of this and other prophecies concerning the largenesse of Christs Kingdome before the end of the world For one hath well observed that Christianity at this day is not above the sixth part of the knowne world whereas the Mahumetans have a fifth and all the rest are Ethnicks and Pagans So that if we divide the world into thirty parts Christianity is but as five in thirty Mahumetanism as six and Ethnicisme as nineteen and so is Christianity the least part of all and plain Heathenism hath far above the one half of the known world and the better part of the other is also Mahumetans And though Christianity hath been imbraced in former times where now it is not yet is it now spread in those places where in those times it was not And therefore all laid together we may account Christianity at this day as large I think as ever it was since the Apostles time But that this is not that universal Kingdome of Christ that flourishing and glorious estate of the Church which yet we expect hope for my reasons are these First These frequent places of Scripture which intimate that the Lord should subdue all People all Kingdoms all Nations and all the ends of the earth unto himselfe and that all these should one day worship and acknowledge him Psal 22.27 All the ends of the world shall turn unto the Lord and all the kindreds of the nations shall worship before him for the Kingdome is the Lords and he is governor among the Nations And Psal 47. Clap your hands all yee people for the Lord is a great King over all the earth he shall subdue the people under us and the nations under our feete And againe God is King of all the earth and reigneth over the Heathen Psal 66. Make a joyfull noise unto God all yee-lands through the greatness of thy power shall thine enemies submit themselves unto thee aâ the earth shall worship thee and sing of thee they shall sing unto thy Name The whole Psal 67. which we read every day is as it were a prophecy and prayer for this great kingdome That the way of God may be knowne upon earth and his saving health among all the Nations let the people praise thee O God let all the people praise thee Then shall the earth yeeld her increase c. God shall blesse us and all the ends of the earth shall fear him And Psal 89. All nations whom thou hast made shall come and worship before thee O Lord and shall glorifie thy Name for thou art great and doest wondrous things thou art God alone And Isa 2. which is a prophecy of Christs Kingdome it is said That the Idols the Lord shall utterly abolish or as some read the Idols shall utterly passe away So Esay 54.5 speaking of the amplitude of the Church of the Gentiles Thy Redeemer saith the Prophet the holy one of Israel the God of the whole earth shall be called Certainly this constant stile of universality implies more then this scantling which yet is small being but one of the least parts of the whole earth Secondly The same conclusion may be gathered from 1 Cor. 15.25 26. compared with Heb. 2.8 Christ must reigne saith St. Paul in the first place quoted till he hath put all his enemies under his feet the last enemy which shall be destroyed is death Hence it followes that Christ shall subdue all his enemies whereof the Prince of this world is the cheife before the last rising of the dead for the subduing of death that is the rising of the dead shal not be afore the rest shall be done the vanquishing of death being the last act of Christs reigning which done he shall yeeld up the Kingdome unto his Father In the other place Heb. 2.8 the Apostle speaking of the same thing alleadgeth that of Psal 8. Thou hast put all things in subjection under his feet and then adds for in that he put all in subjection under him But now marke it we see not all things put under him If any say that the Apostle speakes here of the Kingdome of Glory in Heaven and not of the Kingdom of Grace on Earth I reply first out of the former place that he speaks of such a subjection whereof the rising of the dead shall be the last act of all and which shall be before he yeelds up the kingdome to his Father But neither of these can be affirmed of the kingdome of glory but the contrary viz. The rising of the dead is at the beginning and not at the end of the Kingdome of glory and so is also his yeelding up of his kingdom unto his Father Secondly I reply out of this place that the Apostle speaks of that kingdome and subjection of the earth or state of the earth which was to come For so he speaks v. 5. Unto the Angels he hath not put in subjection ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the earth or state of the earth which shal be ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã of which we speak Here he affirms that ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã is that of whose subjection he meaneth If then ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã signâââs onely the earth ' and the earths inhabitants and is no where in the Scripture otherwise used I cannot see how this place can well beare any other exposition First then to confirme this ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã is the same which the Hebrews call ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã for so the Septuagint renders it whose use of speaking I doubt not but the Apostle followes But ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã most constantly signifies the habitable earth or the earth with the things that live and dwell therein whence the Septuagint though they commonly render it ãâã ãâã
that is a yeare yeares and halfe a yeare In the Revelation it is the beast with so many heads and horns full of names of blasphemy which was to continue forty two moneths the same period with the former which was expressed by times and yeares and the same time with 1260. dayes of the Churches remaining in the Wildernesse When these times whatsoever they be shall be ended then is the period of the times of the Gentiles and of the Jewes misery whereto our Saviour seemes to referre in the Gospel Then by St. Paul shall the fulnesse of the Gentiles enter in Then saith St. John shall the kingdomes of the earth be the Lords and his Christs Then saith Daniel in the former place chap. 7. shall the kingdome and dominion and the greatnesse of the kingdome under the whole heaven be given to the people of the Saints of the most High whose kingdome is an everlasting kingdome and all dominions shall serve and obey him SECT II. The second place in the New Testament is Luke 1. ver 31 32. And behold thou shalt conceive in thy wombe and bring forth a sonne and shalt call his name Iesus And he shall be GREAT and shall be called the sonne of the Highest and the Lord God shall give unto him the THRONE of his FATHER DAVID and he shall reigne over the house of Iacob for ever and of his Kingdome there shall be no end § 1 ON which words observe first that this place is taken out of Isa 9.7 before discussed * of giving to Christ the throne of his father David which is not yet fulfilled For Pag. 182. l. 3. chap. 2. Sect. 12 S. 5. c. § 2 Observe secondly That Christs coming in his Incarnation was a state of the greatest humility that could be Phil. 2.7 8. and that from his birth to his ascension saving but to a few radiating for a minute in his transfiguration to three of the Apostles Matth. 17.1 and his appearing to the rest of his Disciples after his Resurrection and ascending up in their sight Acts 1. And therefore though these words are spoken by the Angel upon occasion of his Incarnation yet are they not applied by the Angel adequatly to set forth his state of Incarnation but rather antithetically extended to carry the minde of Mary c. farre further as thus That though this Jesus shall be conceived in thy wombe a meane woman in comparison of the visible glory of the royall races of Princes yet this Iesus shall be no meane person but shall be GREAT and shall bee called the SON OF THE HIGHEST and shall have the THRONE of his father David and shall REIGNE over the house of JACOB for ever c. which things were never fulfilled all the time of his Incarnation to the day of his Ascension Nor was that the time so much as of the full revelation of them but when the Apostles taking hint from these words of the Angel and the like places of Scripture asked our Saviour Acts 1.6 a little before he ascended Wilt thou at this time restore the Kingdome to ISRAEL comprehending all the twelve Tribes as doth the house of Iacob in the text our Saviour denied not the thing but the revelation of it that time saying vers 7. It is not for you viz. now the words ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. are in the present tence to know the times or the seasons which the Father hath put in his owne power But about seventy yeares after that his ascension God gave the full revelation of it to Christ to shew it by an Angell unto John who might write it to the Churches Revel 1.1 so that § 3 Observe in the third place that at Christs first coming viz. in all the time of his Incarnation from his Birth to his Ascension he was not in the throne of his father David he was in the Manger in the Mountaines more destitute then the Birds and Foxes in a Crowne of Thornes in garments of scorne on the Crosse in the Grave and at last in Heaven but never all that time in the Throne of David The Romans all that time and divers hundreds of yeares after reigned over the Jewes Christ not having any thing of Davids visible corporall government which was the notion of Davids government the High-Priest bearing that which outwardly might be called Spirituall yea when it was offered unto Christ to be made a King and to divide the portions between the Brethren he refused it Therefore § 4 Observe fourthly That the beginning of that Kingdome of Christ which shal be for ever that is after which no Kingdom on earth succeeds as often hath been expounded was not yet begun For after Christs ascension from that day to this other Kingdomes on earth over the Jewes did succeed viz. the Romans Sarazens and Turkes Why the meere spirituall Kingdome of Christ cannot be here understood we have already given unanswerable reasons as we conceive afore when wee parallel'd this place with Isa 9.7 * Pag. 184. l. 1. and why this Kingdome cannot be in Heaven at the ultimate end of the world the reason is at hand because then Christ shall deliver up the Kingdome to God the Father when he shall have put downe ALL rule c. and the sonne himselfe shall be subject to him c. SECT III. The third place in the New Testament for the said visible glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come before the universall Resurrection is in Luke 21.24 And they the Jews shall fall by the edge of the sword and shall be led away captive into all Nations and Jerusalem shall bee trodden downe of the Gentiles untill the times Gr. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã opportunities of the Gentiles be fulfilled Gr. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã filled up OBserve first that our Saviour speaking of the two Tribes that had been now returned from Babylon above five hundred years that they shall be led away captive in all nations must of necessity meane another and a more dispersing captivity following that which was begun by Titus Sonne of Vespasian the Roman Emperour burning both Temple and City selling an hundred thousand Jewes besides the slaughter of eleven hundred thousand about forty yeares after the ascension of Christ as Bucholcerus and Josephus affirme prosecuted by Aelius Adrianus the Roman Emperour about an hundred yeares after Christs ascension at which time the said Aelius Adrianus buried Jerusalem in its own rubbish and gave it to other Nations and Gentiles to inhabite calling it after his own name Aelia promoted yet further by the Saracens making feareful desolations in Judea about a thousand and nine yeares * So Bucholcerus Ind. chron after the Incarnation of Christ and at last this scattering of those two Tribes into all Nations is perfected by the Turkes dominion over them from about the yeare one thousand three hundred after the Incarnation of Christ to this day whereby they are dispersed as our
FACE of Christ but hereafter upon the appearance of Christ at the coming in of the fulnesse of the Gentiles and the call of the Jewes into one universall visible Church God will shine forth most gloriously through the WHOLE PERSON of Christ upon OVR WHOLE PERSONS so that we shall be like him in glory Phil. 3. 21. and we shall know as we are known 1 Cor. 13.12 we shall put off all corporall imperfections and shall apprehend him as well perfectly by our sences as by our graces as will appeare more by that which followes For ¶ 4. We shall behold him with open face or unvailed countenance or uncovered or unmasked persons as the Greeke comprehends all and this being spoken indefinitely and unlimitedly either to the beholder or thing beheld it is safest to take in both answerably opposing the two vailes afore so that 1. All we Jewes and Gentiles that shall partake of this glorious state on earth shall behold with uncovered sences with uncovered reason with uncovered graces Our eyes and mindes shall not be held as Luk 24. that our Phantasie should peirce no further then sence or that sence should apprehend extraordinary things in an ordinary notion And our reason shall not be covered nor cumbred with errour and mistakes and sensible desires and our graces shall not be blind-fold with inordinate carnall affections 2. Christ shall be beheld as altogether uncovered he shall not be covered as to be seene only in Aenigmaticall expressions as the Apostles phrase is in the Greek 1 Cor. 13. 12. or in typicall seales as in receiving the elements of the Holy Supper we are said to shew his death till he comes 1 Cor. 11.26 or in the heavens as now he is or in a personall state of humiliation as when he was on earth in afflictions and sufferings but he shall be wholly uncovered to be seene as he is in his great glory in that time of the Churches restauration on earth at his appearance as it is here said in the next particular ¶ 5. Beholding the glory of the Lord. At his first coming we beheld his ingloriousnesse Phil. 2. Isa 53. After at his transfiguration some two or three saw a glimps of a prelude of his glory After that a few saw at his ascension his entrance into supreame glory Acts 1. But here WEE ALL Jewes and Gentiles in generall whosoever and how many soever converted unto Christ shall behold ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã THAT SAME glory of the Lord. ¶ 6. And so behold as to be changed into the same image A wonderfull and efficacious beholding which shall transforme the Embryon of the new Creature conceived in the wombe of the Soule into the glorious Image of Christ by beholding him in his glory in this state on earth The divine Plants of God in this new Paradise on earth shall so see the Sun of righteousnesse that they shal blossome and flower and fructifie into like colours stripes an rayes as are in that Sun We must as the Greeke ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã signifies be Metamorphosed from our corrupt and inglorious image into the glorious Image of Christ So this text So againe the same Apostle hath it 1 Cor. 15.51 52. The introductory both of the discourse and of the thing leading to this change in verse fifty one begins at vers 22. which we have laboriously opened afore but in the seventh Section immediatly preceding To which adde this memorandum that Paul expresly treates there only of the resurrection of Beleevers as that at Christs next coming When saith the Apostle we shall not ALL sleep but we shall ALL be changed The dead shall be raised incorruptible and we shall be changed This corruptible must put on incorruption and this mortall must put on immortality then death is swallowed up And this change is said to be glorious vers 49. As we have borne the image of the earthly so we shall beare the image of the heavenly Adam viz. Christ Which suite to our present text in this 2 Cor. 3.18 That we shall so behold the glory of Christ that we shall be Metamorphosed transformed into the same image By which parallel ye perceive what the Apostle meanes by this transformation into the same glorious Image viz. to our glorious state on earth at the first resurrection of the Saints at Christs next coming At our first conversion we have some spirituall inward change Of this our Apostle made mention afore in this 2 Cor. 3. viz. vers 16. in that phrase of turning to the Lord. And vers 17. in those words where the Spirit of the Lord is there is liberty But in that clause in the last verse of Metamorphosing into the same Image some greater thing must be intended For ¶ 8. It followes we must be changed into the same Image from glory to glory which sounds of a future For from glory to glory must signifie more then a processe from one degree of grace to another as it is intended in Psal 84. from strength to strength and Rom. 1.17 from faith to faith for though that be the beginning and touched vers 16. 17. of this 2 Cor. 3. yet here the Apostle drives at the ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the exaltation of a Saint to his height and must import that the former glory is suitable to the latter glory which is true of personall glory on earth at Christs next appearance that it is like to the latter viz. ultimate glory both glorifying the whole man whereas the glory of our imperfect sanctification doth glorifie only the inward man and that too but in part There is also a difference in the cause as it is in the last clause viz. ¶ 9. By the Lord the Spirit as we touched the Translation afore whereby it is plainly held forth that whereas our inward glory of Sanctification in all the processe thereof is from the inward power of the Spirit of the Lord our personall glory of soule and body at the said coming of Christ is from his personall presence transcendently and efficaciously radiating on our persons to a change and filling the earth with the beames of his glory Now weigh all together and see whether the whole minde of this text can be terminated in our conversion and sanctification or can be wholly extended to ultimate and supreamest glory Or can be fixt upon that unsuitable time of converting Israel at the day of the ultimate Judgement And if not then it is yet to come before the ultimate generall day of Doome SECT IX The Ninth place in the New Testament for the glorious state of all things on earth at Christs next appearance is Phil. 2.9 10 11. God hath highly exalted him Christ and given him a name above every name that at the name of Jesus every knee shall bow of things in heaven and things in the earth and thing under the earth and that every tongue should confesse that Jesus Christ is the Lord to the glory of God the
generall Judgement because then is a totall destruction not an appearance for conversion of them that are found in unbeleefe Then is the Saints full enjoyment of utmost glory not their striving with the Nations Then Christ layes downe all power 1 Cor. 15. therefore doth not put power into the hands of his people SECT XI The eleventh place in the New Testament is Revel 3.21 To him that over-cometh will I grant to sit with me in my Throne even as I also over-came and am set downe with my Father in his Throne § 1 VVHat can we make of this Text unlesse we understand the Saints viz. sincere Soules and cordiall Christians that persevere to the end reigning with Christ on EARTH As it is by and by added chap. 5.10 which the foure Animals and twenty foure Elders expresse in a Song of praise to Christ Thou hast made us unto our God Kings and Priests and we shall REIGN ON EARTH On which our New Annotations confesse That this may signifie the PROSPEROVS TIMES OF THE CHURCH UNDER CHRISTIAN KINGS AND EMPEROVRS Dan. 7.27 which place as we have largely afore demonstrated * Pag. 126. S. 4. p. 127 c. Again p. 249 Sect. 36. c. doth plainly signifie the glorious state of the Church on earth yet to come Psa 37.11 But the meek shall INHERIT THE EARTH Matth. 5.5 Blessed are the meek for they shall INHERIT THE EARTH Thus they which must signifie a State to come as the expression is in the Future tence and experience shewes us that in past times the meeke have not in the generall INHERITED the earth but in all Ages have been sorely disturbed and distressed That state of Christs Kingdome hath not yet come for it followes in this text deeply to be considered that § 2 It is granted here by Christ himselfe that as he is God and Man he hath not hitherto sate upon his owne Throne but upon his Fathers Throne the highest heaven of glory should seem is the Fathers Throne as it is oft expressed in the Old Testament Psal 11.4 Isa 66.1 c. And there Christ is now Coloss 3.1 but the time is yet to come according to the future expression of the text long after Christs Ascension that Christ must have a Throne of his owne on which together with him those that overcome shall sit § 3 Now this must needs be on earth because after the Judgement Day on earth Rev. 20.11 c. to the end of the chapter Christ layes downe all his power 1 Cor. 15.24 28. SECT XII The Twelfth and last place in the New Testament which we shall urge for this particular under consideration is Revel the 18. 19. chapters § 1 THe Prophesies whereof are not yet fulfilled to this day so long since the Ascension of Christ ¶ 1. Note that ver 2. of the eighteenth Chapter where it is said Babylon is fallen is fallen for whether wee understand New Babylon figuratively so called viz. Rome described by her seven Hils and seven sorts of Government and the ten Kingdoms under the seventh Rev. 17.9 10 11 12. or old Babylon properly so named viz. where the Jewes were held captive neither of them since this Prophesie are so fallen as is described in the following Verses of this Chapter of which by and by but stil the Popish Antichrist possesseth the one and the Turkish the other and both in the ruffe to this very day ¶ 2. Nor is that in the fourth and sixth verses yet fulfilled wherein the People of God are commanded saying Reward her even as she rewarded you and double unto her double according to her works and the cup which she hath filled fill to her double for the people of God have not yet rewarded her either old or new Babylon single but as ver 7. Shee glorifies her selfe and lives deliciously yea and oppresseth the people of God ¶ 3. Nor is that yet fulfilled vers 8. That her Plagues have come in one day viz. Death and Mourning and Famine and utter burning But she both elder and younger stands in great glory to this day ¶ 4. Nor is that yet fulfilled ver 9. That the Kings of the earth that have committed Spirituall fornication and lived deliciously with her shal bewaile her and lament for her seeing the smoake of her burning But generally they rejoyce with her and for her glory in which she is at this day ¶ 5. Nor is that yet fulfilled mentioned from verse eleventh to the end of the nineteenth of the mourning of the Merchants over her destruction by fire standing afarre off crying Alas alas But contrariwise they flocke to her trade with her and admire her glory It is true the Gothes and Vandals have conquered new Babylon and spoyled her as we mentioned afore but not she nor old Babylon is yet totally destroyed by fire that there should be no Candle seen or Milstone heard in them ver 20. 22. but both flourish with great glory in their dominion over the people of God ¶ 6. Nor is that in the twentieth verse yet fulfilled that the holy Apostles and Prophets have yet since this Text was penned ever rejoyced in the destruction of either Babylons but both Babylons doe yet triumph in their owne prosperity and power over the Nations and among them over many Saints vers 7. yea the rejoycing of the Apostles and Prophets over Babylons destruction doth signifie one would thinke the triumph of the Church over their enemies on earth at the first Resurrection of which wee have so largely spoken afore For when else possibly can the Prophets and Apostles rejoyce over the destruction of Babylon § 2 ## For so it followes in the nineteenth Chapter and first seven Verses spoken over foure times Hallelujah that is as it is englished in verse the fift Praise yee God which praise is given to God by the foure Animals and twenty foure Elders and of a great multitude Why because Gods Judgements are righteous and true Wherein Because he hath judged the great Whore which did corrupt the earth and hath avenged the bloud of the Saints at her hand And he the Lord God Omnipotent reigneth and the Marriage of the Lamb is come and his Wife hath made her selfe ready ¶ 1. Which last clauses cleerly relate to the first Resurrection wherein all the Saints rise so that the ruine of Babylon and the raising of the Saints immediatly concurre with the sorrow of the one and the triumph of the other But these have not been fulfilled to this day as the contrary face of things gives evident testimony ¶ 2. Nor is that fulfilled from the eighth verse of the nineteenth Chapter to the end of the Chapter of the glory of the Church of the glorious appearance of Christ and of the corporall destruction of all whatsoever that take part against Christ and his Church largely discussed afore more then once out of this Chapter But these things as sure as Christ is the
tranquillous and most happy life because the earth then shall not be infested with any noyse of Arms. And all those wars which before were stoutly waged by reason of the difference of Religion shall then cease The cause ceasing the effect ceaseth After the Prophet had spoken of the time of the Messiah presently he proceeds to those things that are to follow viz. to the day of judgement and the resurrection of the dead For saith he the day of the Lord shal be on every one that is proud and lofty c. upon all the Cedars of Lebanon and upon all the oaks of Bashan and upon all the ships of Tarshish c. No doubt saith he but by ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã THE DAY OF THE LORD the Prophet signifies the day of judgement as we shall afterward demonstrate which otherwise is called the day of resurrection of the dead for then the dead are judged called also the day of the Lord because a day of admiration Nothing then that is ordinary shall be done but all above nature c. He alleadgeth likewise for the said head of this Chapter that in Isa 23.14 They shall lift up their voice they shal sing for the Majesty of the Lord c. And Isa 49.14 c. But Zion saith the Lord hath forsaken me c. Can a woman forget her sucking child Psalâ 72.16 And they of the City so Menasse renders it shal flourish as the here out of the earth Thus far we have shewn by Scripture saith he that the resurrection of the dead shall be conjunctive to the coming of the Messiah next it remains to be proved that the Ancients were of the same opinion It is to be noted what reason they give why the Patriarchs so much desired to be buried in the Holy-land which was no other then this That they that are there buried shall FIRST RISE * So in Beresit Raba-Paras 74 66. Semot R. pur 32. From whence is inferred That the resurrection of the dead to the comming of the Messiah is annexed in time The same is found also elsewhere ** In the Jerusalmy de Kilaym And so Semuel in Gemarah de berahot ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. i.e. This world doth not differ from the dayes of the Messiah but in the subjecting of Kings In Zoar â Paras voyera Elar is manifestly and cleerly expressed ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. i.e. The blessed God shal first build the Temple and order and dispose the Pallace and build the City and then the dead shall be raised out of the dust The Cabalists do sound their opinion on the words of the Psalmist Psal 147.2 3. The Lord buildeth up Jerusalem he gathereth together the out casts of Israel he healeth the broken in heart and bindeth up their wounds 3 In the next viz. the third Chapter of that third Book the Rabbin solves this Question Whether within the aforesaid times shal be the end of the world or after the resurrection of the dead This Question saith he may easily be resolved by that we have said in the former Chapter For when the sacred Scripture treats concerning the dayes of the Messiah it alwayes calls that time ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã i.e. the end of dayes So Gen. 49.1 Gather your selves together saith Jacob to his sons and I will tell you that which shall befall you ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã in the end of dayes Upon which R. Moses Gerundensis commentating saith where ever there is speech concerning the end of dayes it is to be understood of the dayes of the Messia Jacob would have told his sons what should befall them in the dayes of the Messiah but God inhibited him The like phrase is in Balaams speech in Numb 24.14 c. Come I will advertise thee what this people shal do to thy people in the end of dayes I shal see him saith he speaking of the Messiah but not Now I shal behold him but not nigh There shal come a Star out of Jacob and a Scepter shal arise out of Israel he shal strike through the corners of Moab and destroy all the children of Seth. Note that the time is by him called the end of dayes Therefore he saith I see it but not nigh Againe when he saith he will destroy or demolish the children of Seth he means the inhabitants of the whole world From whence it doth appear that that is to be understood of the Messiah He the said Rabby alleadgeth many other places for that phrase the end of dayes to be taken for the dayes of the Messiah yet to come as Isa 2.2 Jer. 30.24 Chap. 31.1 Ezek. 38.16 Hos 3.5 Mich. 4.1 Dan. 10.14 And because saith R. Menasse our deliverance is deferred to so long a time hence and distant from us therefore David makes that vehement complaint Psal 89. v. 49. O Lord where are thy former loving kindnesses which thou swarest unto David in thy truth c. But I am not ignorant saith Menasse that they that dissent from us do make a double coming of the Messiah and so do expound those places far otherwise But I have no list saith he at this time to dispute with any concerning that thing but simply and candidly to hold forth the opinion which the Hebrews professe From what hath been said two things saith he doe necessarily follow One that the redemption of Israel shall be extended unto the end of the world The other that that same end shall come before the resurrection of the dead And because that end shall take its beginning in the dayes of Messiah therefore there is a necessity that a NEW WORLD SHALL BEGIN FROM THE RESVRRECTION OF THE DEAD therefore it is called ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã The world to come Dan. 12. v. ult Go thy way unto the end and rest and awake in thy lot in the end of dayes The same is to bee collected out of the saying of the Ancients * In Gemara Abodae Zarae cap. 1. cap. 6. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã c. It is pronounced in the School of Elia not the Thesbit but of some Rabbin that the world shall continue six thousand yeers In two thousand is the void or empty time that is the time untill Abraham being void of Moses Law In two thousand is the time of the Law In two thousand are the dayes of the Messiah So that as it is read elsewhere * In Sebet Jeudah It is not said that the Messiah shal come in the end of four thousand yeers or in the beginning of five thousand yeers but onely that the dayes of the Messiah shall be two thousand yeers that is that within that space the Messiah shall come about the beginning middle or end Which last words say I are very considerable by us Christians For within that space Christ is come and will come â again ¶ 4 In the fourth Chapter are declared the opinions of the ancient Rabbins concerning
make drunk the inhabitants of the earth by his Vicar the Beast under the vizzard of devotion or Church I say to this beside what we have said already to anticipate this objection I adde that herein it seems to mee the Doctor hath forgotten some most evidently plaine Texts For all along the Revelation untill the very time of the utter ruine of Antichrist there is expresse mention of the Devils making the Nations drunke by his Vicar the Beast with the wine of spiritual fornication i.e. of departing from Christ to worship Idols or to imbrace false worship And with all it is expressed that this is the cause of the ruine of the Beast the Harlot the Vicar of Christ So expresly Rev. 14.8 verse Babylon is fallen is fallen because she hath made the Nations drunk with the wine of the wrath of her fornication Rev. 17.1 2 3. I will shew thee the judgement of the great Whore with whom the Kings of the earth have committed fornication and the inhabitants of the earth have been made drunk with the wine of her fornication Rev. 18.2 3. An Angel cryed mightily with a strong voice saying Babylon the Great is fallen is fallen and is become the habitation of devils For all Nations have drunk of the wine of the wrath of her fornication Rev. 19.1 2. Ye have the same thing more plainly without figures A voyce of much people saying Allelujah to the Lord for true and righteous are his judgements for he hath judged the great Whore which did corrupt the earth with her fornication And in the latter end of this same Chapter is a full end of the Beast and false Prophet viz. cast into the lake of fire Observe First That in one of these places viz. Rev. 17.2 There is mention onely of wine of fornication to signifie the sinne of spiritual adultery viz. Idolatry In opposition to this to signifie the judgement due to this sinne it is said the Wine of the wrath of God So Rev. 14.10 Rev. 16.19 For this cause in the other two places Rev. 17.2 Rev. 18.3 the phrases to signifie both sin and judgement are put together Wine of wrath of fornication to the end that wee might carry along with us in our minds that all the time of the Harlot shee made the Nations drunk therefore all that while wrath hung over her till it fell down upon her and brought her to unter ruine as we see the fulfilling set down Chapter 19. latter end Secondly observe that in opposition to this making the Nations drunke with the wine of spiritual fornication is added presently after the ruine of that drunken-making Harlot Chap. 19. ult That in Chap. 20.1 c. Satan is bound cast into the Pit and sealed that he may seduce or deceive the Nations no more till the thousand yeers bee finished Yee see then how cleerly this passage of the Doctor is answered and that that in Rev. 20. vers 3. must mean that Satan should be bound that hee should not by his Vicar make the Nations so much as drunk with the wine of her fornication of Idolatrous doctrines For as Pareus expounds As wine is pleasant to the eye and taste so Antichrist did make the Kings and Inhabitants of the earth take downe his doctrines of departing from Christ and imbracing of Idolatrous worship under pretence of Religion devotion and Church See Pareus on Rev. 14.17.18 afore quoted and so Pareus brings up the Reere full against the Doctor ¶ 3 To that clause wherein the Doctor doth undertake to give the sense of Satans not seducing the Nations to signifie That he shall not in an universal War by the open enemies of Christ with force and Armes compell men to Paganisme and to as it were abjured Idolatry and Superstition I say to this clause and this exposition therein besides what hath been said we adde First That by this opinion Satans binding must begin at Constantine the Great And that Satan should no more so seduce the Nations to an universall Warre with force of Arms to compell men to Paganisme till the time of the rising of Gog and Magog to Warre for so the Doctor doth after expresly declare his sense I say that by this opinion of the Doctor Satan is still bound ever since the time of Constantine 310 yeers since Christ which make above a thousand yeers viz. one thousand three hundred and forty and upwards So reckon but to this day and Satan is bound above three hundred and forty yeers above the thousand yeers so precisely limited by the Apostle John Revel 20. And yet still shall bee bound according to the Doctors opinion till the War of Gog and Magog which will bee a thousand yeers more and the last thousand afore the ultimate judgement So Satan shall by this account bee bound I know not how much above two thousand yeers contrary to St. John Note secondly That by the Dr. from Constantines time down-ward to this day Satan was not bound in his efficacy upon his instruments but only the shape and manner of the actings of his instruments were changed so the system and method of the Revelation expresly Rev. 13.1.12 in 1 verse hee ariseth out of the Sea and hath seven heads and ten horns and the Dragon gave him his power and verse 11. and 12. Hee comes up out of the earth and hath two hornes like a Lamb and spake as a DRAGON and he exerciseth all the power of the first Beast and causeth the earth and them that dwell therein to worship the first Beast So that yee see the devils power the same still the Dragon acts effectually onely the shape of his instruments is changed And therefore the continuance of the Beast in power is computed two and forty months i.e. One thousand two hundred sixty yeers And the Dragon is said to persecute the Woman the Church and indeavoured War after Constantine for the space of One thousand one hundred and sixty yeers Rev. 12. For so long she flyes and abides in the wildernesse Now if the Beast hath power One thousand two hundred and sixty yeers beginning presently after Constantines time within eighty yeers where then shall bee place found for the thousand yeers of binding Satan presently after Constantine For Satan is not bound as long as Antichrist is in power who is in power to this day § 5 But I need not pursue further The Doctor himselfe sees S. 2. afore great objections against this opinion of his of the thousand yeers next to Constantine and of his interpretation of Satans binding to be onely from open general War to all which hee indeavours to answer But he answers not satisfactorily to mee For first in generall we answer to that he objects of Arrianisme after Constantine Apostasies in Julian and Devastations by Goths Vandals and Saracens that these make not up the all that may be objected against the binding up of Satan from Constant M. and down-ward for a thousand yeers For mark
is creation wee now look at not the qualifications themselves which is the businesse of the third Head in the next Section Isa 65.18 19. Be you glad and rejoyce for ever in that which I CREATE for behold I CREATE Jerusalem a REJOYCING and I will rejoyce in Jerusalem and joy in my people and the voyce of weeping or crying shall be no more heard in her All which are spoken as a parcel of the glorious state of the New Heaven and Earth and New Jerusalem Consonant to St. Johns description of the New Heavens and New Earth and of holy New Jerusalem Rev. 21.1 2 3 4 5. That there is the voyce of triumph from Heaven saying The Tabernacle of God is with men and he will dwell with them c. And God shall wipe away all tears c. and there shall be no more sorrow c. because he that sate upon the Throne said Behold I MAKE ALL THINGS NEW write for these things are true ¶ 4 There shall be at that time created a desence upon or over the Saints over the Church and over all their glory so that their glorious enjoyment in that glorious estate on earth shall not bee subject as formerly to any invasions subversions interruptions or diminutions from any power on earth or in hell Isa 4. verse 4 5. When the Lord shall have washed away the filth of the daughters of Zion then the Lord will CREATE upon every dwelling place of Mount Zion and upon her assemblies a cloud of smoake by day and the shining of a flaming fire by night alluding to the pillar of fire that lead Israel in the wildernesse for UPON ALL THE GLORY SHALL BE A DEFENCE So that what ever shall be hereafter affirmed in this our sixth Book according to the Scriptures touching the excellency of the RESTITUTION or glorious state of all things yet to be on earth shall be an established estate that no enemy shall be able in the least to remove or molest But why do the Scriptures cal this RESTAURATION or RESTITUTION a Creation Surely because of the great likenesse if not samenesse in kinde with the first Creation as to the Physical notion thereof both in regard of matter manner parts and end ¶ 1 As for matter as the immediate Creation viz. of the Chaos was of nothing so mediate Creation viz. of particulars out of that Chaos was of nothing such nothing so or no such thing as into which it was created So that as the first sort of creation was of absolute nothing so the second comparatively or equivalently of nothing For what was the confused clouded Chaos towards the forming of light life and beauty c Even so in this New creation the world shall be asit were resolved into a Chaos again All things shall be in a most confused and forlorne condition men shall be stript of humanity the earth shall be an Aceldoma and Golgotha all things full of unparalleld troubles as our Saviour describes Matth. 24. And lo then shall Christ appeare most gloriously to new-create all things as t is in that same 24. of Matth. Just as we find it Prophesied throughout the Old Testament in most of the Prophesies afore discussed as Hos 3 4 5. Dan 12.1 c. that Christ shall restore all things in the most desolate and Miserable times Most suitable matter for that efficient who is to worke upon it The best cause to worke upon the worst matter He that is All-things yea more then All-things the All-sufficient Almighty to worke upon those nothings who can worke better on that worst then the best of creatures can upon the best and most prepared things For materiam superabit opus the workmanship shall exceed the matter So that as God alone was able and did educe out of those nothings Gen. 1. this beautifull Fabricke of the world so Christ Jesus our Lord shall out of those worse-then-nothings create this glorious new world of which we treat ¶ 2 For manner also it is a Creation in that like the creation of the first world the main parts of this New shal be made in an instant It is true that the Philosophers say that generation is ex nihilo tali in instanti of a nothing so and in an instant as plants of seeds birds of egges beasts of their Semen as are likewise the bodies of men But this Philosophical Generation notwithstanding in the first part viz. that it is of that which is nothing so is far below the lowest namely Mediate Creation in that generation is by very many previous dispositions and various successive preparations of the matter gradually bringing those bodies to their kinde whereas Creation even mediate creation in one act brings forth every thing perfect at once As for the second part of their description of generation that it is done in an instant that is the forme is introduced in an instant I think excepting mens souls it is a meer tradition and fable grounded upon another fiction of wit that material forms are substances which being beleeved in the Schools hath brought in with it a many inextricable knots as how the formes of the Elements remaiâe in the mixed body compounded of them how the forme is educed out of the power of the matter as they affirme and yet the forme is a substance of a different nature from the matter and is a distinct co-ordinate essential principle in specie How a sword killing an horse or the like drives out one forme and brings in another or else there were more then one forme afore or else matter may subsist without a forme c. whereas creation yea mediate creation introduceth all formes of things yea and of men too in an instant As we see in the First Creation in every dayes worke It was but said Let it be so and presently it was so And so proportionably will it be in the New Creation that by parts Christ will doe great things suddenly First The call of the Jewes shall be on a sudden Isa 66.8 Who hath heard such a thing who hath seen such things shall the earth be made to bring forth in one day or shall a Nation be borne at ONCE For as soon as Zion travelled she brought forth her children Secondly The appearance of Christ shall be on a sudden Matth. 24.27 As the lightning commeth out of the East and shineth even to the West so also shall the comming of the Sonne of man be Thirdly The change of beleevers surviving at Christs comming shall be in a moment in the twinkling of an eye 1 Cor. 15.51 Behold I shew unto you a MYSTERY we shall not all sleep but we shall all be CHANGED in a moment in the twinkling of an eye Fourthly The resurrection of the deceased Saints at Christs comming shall be in like manner Ibid. 1 Cor. 15.52 We shall be changed in a moment in the twinkling of an eye at the last trump For the Trumpet shall sound and the dead shall
HARD BONDAGE Observe both to what persons and what time these high expressions relate before largely opened and we shal easily conclude this Text was never yet fulfilled and therefore according to the truth of God must bee fulfilled before the ultimate day of judgement for with that time this Prophesie cannot agree ¶ 6 In Isa 25.8 we have it plenissimè planissimè most fully and plainly That in that day viz. of the great restauration of the Church and ruine of their enemies verse 5 6. The Lord will WIPE AWAY ALL TEARS FROM ALL FACES And the rebuke of his people shall hee take away FROM OFF ALL THE EARTH for the Lord hath spoken it Which was never yet fulfilled and therefore is yet to come at the time we treat off as hath been before demonstrated ¶ 7 Isa 54.13 14. is also very high in expressions Thy children shall be taught of the Lord and great shall be the peace of thy children In righteousnesse shalt thou be ESTABLISHED thou shalt be far from oppression for thou SHALT NOT FEAR and FROM TERROR for it SHAL NOT COME NEER THEE You see the expressions are exceeding high and they are evidently spoken concerning external rest as well as internal and wee see it by experience that this place was never yet fulfilled therefore it is yet to come as we have cleered it afore ¶ 8 In Isa 60.14 c. it is thus written The Sonnes of them that aâflicted thee shall come BENDING TO THEE and all that despised thee shall BOW THEMSELVES DOWN AT THE SOLES of thy feet Whereas thou hast been forsaken I will make thee an ETERNAL EXCELLENCY violence shall be NO MORE heard in thy land The dayes of thy mourning shall be ENDED Which place relates to our Thesis as is before demonstrated The expressions are far too high for us to acknowledge they have been fulfilled therefore we must expect them yet to come before the ultimate day of judgement for that will be no fit time for this Prophesie ¶ 9. Isa 65.19 is likewise very full to the particular in hand though in few words viz. I will joy in my people and the voyce of weeping or crying shall be NO MORE HEARD IN HER. Let the Reader judge whether this was ever yet fulfilled ¶ 10. Isa tells us Chap. 66.12 Thus saith the Lord I will extend peace to her the Church consisting of Jews and Gentiles as a river and the glory of the Gentiles like a flowing stream I leave it likewise to the Reader to consider whether hee hath not reason to expect this as yet to come ¶ 11 We come to the Prophesies of Jeremiah Chap. 23.3 4. I will gather the remnant of my flocke out of all Countries c. and they shall fear no more nor be dismayed Which expressions are a great deal too high for our knowledge of Scripture of history or of experience to acknowledge them to have been fulfilled to this day And therefore our faith must be on God for the fulfilling of them and that before the ultimate day of judgement as the nature of the things require ¶ 12 We have in the same Prophet Chap. 30. verse 10. Jacob shall returne and shall be in rest and quiet and none shall make him afraid ¶ 13 Place is in Jer. 46.27 28. to the same effect ¶ 14 Place is in Ezek. 28.24 There shall be no more a pricking briar unto the house of Israel nor any grieving thorne of all that are round about them ¶ 15 Place Mich. 4.1 2 3. The same with Isa 2. v. 2 3 4. It s added here in verse 4. They shall sit every man under his owne vine c. and none shall make them afraid ¶ 16 Place Zeph. 3.13 14 15. They shall feed and lye downe and none shall make them afraid Sing O daughter of Zion rejoyce with all the heart the Lord hath taken away thy judgements he hath cast out thine enemies The Lord is in the midst of thee thou shalt not see evill any more This and all the rest have been proved to mean the time intended in our Position § 2 Adde in the New Testament ¶ 1 Matth. 19.29 Shall receive an hundred fold and inherit eternal life of the large opening of this place see before in the third Book ¶ 2 That in 2 Thess 1.7.9 10. To you REST as Heb. 4. when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed FROM HEAVEN his enemies being punished from the presence of the Lord as Chap. 2. and from the glory of his POWER ¶ Rev. 7.16 17 They that are sealed c. serve him day and night in HIS TEMPLE he that sitteth on the Throne shall dwell among them They shall hunger no more for the Lamb in the middest of the Throne shall feed them and wipe away all tears from their eyes ¶ 4 Rev. 21.4 St. John speaking of the state of the Church in the thousand yeers saith God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes and there shall be no more sorrowing nor crying nor paine Every verse of this Chapter shewes it cannot bee meant of everlasting happinesse in the highest heavens Let the close of this Section be to encourage us to patience Patience in perseverance and patience in sufferance Now is Christs Kingdome of patience But anon his Kingdome of peace Twice it is said of the present state of sufferings Here is the patience of the Saints Rev. 13.10 and 14.12 Once it is said Keep the word of patience Rev. 3.10 But after a while comes the Kingdome of peace therefore Christ seales up all the Bible and all the Revelation almost with this Rev. 22.11 12. He that is righteous let him be righteous still He that is holy let him be holy still and behold I come quickly and my reward is with me Then in the last verse save one sc 20. Surely I come quickly Amen Amen Then to that end Iohns prayer closeth all as I close in verse 21. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all Amen SECT III. § 1 THus you have seen it is a sorrowlesse condition Next follows it shall be a deathlesse condition The Elect once raised at the beginning of the thousand yeers shall dye no more much lesse those alive and changed For if those alive shall not prevent them that are asleep given by the Apostle as an answer to an Objection against this Resurrection much lesse shall they that are alive being the patterne to whom the dead are promoted bee sent to death as to give place to the Elect dead that are raised And if all the Elect are raised to what end or use shall they dye that are alive If it be the priviledge that the other Saints shall be alive at Christs comming why shall they dye when here in soule and body they may behold him which is a fuller injoyment If this time of Christs appearance at the beginning of the thousand yeers be the Kingdome of Saints the prefacing beginning of their full
is risen upon thee Darknesse on the earth and people thereof but the Lord shall rise upon thee and his glory shall be seen upon thee This shining is inward and outward For as the Church shall shine in her selfe with Gods beams So verse 3. The Gentiles shall come to thy light and Kings to the brightnesse of thy rising And verse 6. They from Sheba c. shall bring gold and incense and shall shew forth the praises of the Lord. Accordingly Rev. 21 as the Church is glorious in her selfe so from without verse 24. The Nations of them that are saved shal walke in the light of the Church which God shines on it and Kings shall bring their honor unto it As is the glory of the Sun in its ascending over every Horizon is the glory of the world In the inside in the life of all things In the outside in the light and lustre on all So shall it bee with the Church If in this time as Isa 30.26 At the day the Lord bindeth up the breach of his people the light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun c. So gloriously shall God manifest himselfe to the Church that all glory shall her condition be As New Jerusalem is new decked c. Rev. 21. So all her buildings walls streets gates c. according to Isa 54. verse 11. are compared to gold and all precious stones which comparison of glorious gold and precious stones c. import all manner of glory of the Church If our bodies shall bee conformed to Christs glorious body so every bodily thing shall have the highest perfection that it was created in And the best jewels and treasures shall not be appropriated to Heathens Atheists Popish Hypocrites or gracelesse Kings and Princes and Potentates But if it may adde to the Churches glory they shall be brought to the Church as right owner ¶ 2 Environed with peace and safety Christ the King and Prince of peace Heb. 7. Isa 9. Createth peace for all his subjects far and neer Isa 57.19 sc As inward peace So outward too Isa 65. last No preying on one another no destroying no hurting So Psal 72.3.7 See the Title sc A Psalme for Solomon sc Solomon the Great sc Christ The Mountaines shall bring peace to the people and little hils by righteousnesse In his dayes shall the righteous flourish and abundance of peace as long AS THE MOON INDURES See by this what Solomon is meant Mountains and Hils signifie that Emperours Princes Dukes Lords c. shall no longer as Mountaines shadow the Church by oppression or that men shall not make mountaines and hills holds and garrisons to subdue the Church Isa 11.6 There shall be peace between Man and all creatures between Children and Aspes the Wolfe and Lamb Cow and Bear of which say two learned Authors there is both a spiritual and litteral sense All men with their great power glory wits policies and potency shall be so tame as a childe may rule them and all creatures shall be restored as in the day of Creation Calvin upon this 11. of Isa 6. saith That the Prophet aimes at a further thing then we are aware of For it intimates saith he a restauration of all things as at the first creation and so goes on in many words See learned men consulâò handling this question are lost in Allegories but when they are off of that question sincerely weighing the places of Scripture tending to it then it drops from them ere they are aware So Calvin here So Pareus on Rom. 8. is against Pareus on Rev. 20. ¶ 3 Enlarged with liberty It is the great yeer of Jubilee even in the opinion of the Jews As it is freedome from all evill as we have shewed so a freedome to injoy all good They shall have the waters of life the comforts of the Gospel free for their use Rev. 22.17 and enough for all And the Tree of life Christ free for all to injoy him fully Verse 2. And the Gates of the Church are alwayes open freely for all Saints to enter Rev. 21. They shall bee as free in all injoyments as in heaven for this is an Heaven ¶ 4 Perpetuated with stable equability Now they fully injoy him that is the first and last with an even continuance the heavens and earth must be as one as he pleaseth Isa 48.12 13. And this his Title of Alpha and Omega Christ makes his preface Rev. 1.17 to the glorious Catastrophe Rev. 20.4 c. to the end of the Bible Now the substance of all eternity is entred upon Christ the everlasting Father the eternall God the everlasting Spirit and Covenant c. must now appeare in a perpetuated stability of all perfect Church glory to all the Elect. Magog shall not interrupt but occasionally promote the Churches eternall blisse Therefore now let not our hearts be unstable in hope nor our affections unstable in love nor our judgements unstable in principles nor our practice unstable in duties and ordinances Remember the evill of the foolish Virgins Remember the good precepts and promises of Christ as a warning us afore his comming now at hand Rev. 22.7.11 12 13 14 15 16 17. v. 7. I come quickly blessed is he that keepeth these sayings of this Prophesie Verse 11. Let him that is righteous be righteous still 12. Behold I come quickly and my reward is with me I am Alpha and Omega sc I make no other end or beginning but happinesse in and with me 14. Blessed are they that keep his commandements that they may eat of the Tree of life and enter the Gates of the City of the Church Without shall be Dogs They that are found out of it shall goe for Dogs 16. I Jesus have sent my Angel to testifie these things to the CHURCHES 17. Hee that testifies these things saith Surely I come quickly then John concludes as I Come Lord Jesus come quickly SECT X. This state will have the face and character of Eternity IN the three last Qualities of this state of the Church sc First No more time Secondly A perfection of Qualities natural and spirituall in the Saints Thirdly A confluence of all comforts in the injoyer and the injoyment I say in regard of these three This state of the Church will have the face a semblance of Eternity the property and character of Eternity For the idiom and peculiar of Eternity is to give a man all parts and degrees of his comfort at once throughout every moment of Eternity In Time is succession where is the beginning middle and the end The embrion augment and the highest perfection that that comfort will amount to but in Eternity a man is as happy the first moment as ten thousand yeers after if there were any time in Eternity So here proportionably the Saints blisse after Christ hath begun the compleatnesse of this estate shall be as full at first as at last The difference from a state in Time is as
in these comparisons As the Summer Sunne rising ascending and setting differs from the heavens continued into one whole Sunne whereby it would be alwayes day and alwayes glorious Summer And as a River differs from a Sea of sweet waters the River exists by succession the Sea is still the same fixed So in this state we speake of Every injoyment and injoyer shall bee as full at first in perfection and joy as at last CHAP. V. THus of Qualities now wee come to Priviledges sc That which Saints had afore either in common with others or in an ordinary degree they shall now have in a way of special Priviledge and preheminence SECT I. First Priviledge The fulfilling of most things that before were but foretold § 1 THe Mysteries and Prophesies which before they had but in the Word now they shall have in the thing ¶ 1 For Mysteries See Rev. 11.19 The Temple of God was opened and there was seen in his Temple the Arke of his Testament This cleerly relates to the time we speake of as it is evident in verse 15. The seventh Angel sounded c. And the Temple of God was opened in Heaven By comparing this with Rev. 21. verse 22 the thing is plainer And I saw no Temple therein but the Lord God Almighty and the Lamb was the Temple And this also relates to the same time See verse 1. I saw New Heaven and New Earth Verse 2. And I saw New Jerusalem This Prophesie plainly foretels of a kinde of Temple in those dayes of which we speak In Ezek. wee have much of the measures of the Temple So Ezek. Chapter 41. and 42. c. cleerly relating to a New Testament time by St. Johns exposition Rev 21. And Malachy tels us Chap. 3. verse 1. The Lord will suddenly come to his Temple And John saith Rev. 7.15 The Saints serve God day and night in his Temple Chap. 11.1 The Temple is measured Chap. 14 15 17. Angels come out of the Temple Chap. 15.5 The Temple of the Tabernacle of the Testimony in heaven was opened Chap. 16.1.17 Voyces come out of the Temple And in the Text wee alleadged Chap. 11. v. 19. The Temple of God was open and the Arke was seen Now what is the meaning of all Surely a Temple equivalently they shall have But no Temple properly as it is said Rev. 21. v. 22. I saw no Temple But God and the Lamb was that equivalent Temple yea that super-eminent Temple And the presence of God in Christ shall bee such with them that as Rev. 11.19 that spiritual Arke shall not be hid as was the material Ark in the Old Testament Temple but shall be seen In the Ark was the Table of the Law and the Pot of Manna Christ the end of the Law Rom. 10.4 And Christ and his word is the Manna Rev. 2. The Arke was in the holiest of Holies which was seldome seen and onely when the High Priest went in But now this spiritual Arke in this glorious time is commonly seen Observe That the Arke typified Christ and his Word As the Temple was a pledge of Gods presence as before that the Tabernacle was So that the meaning is That now Gods presence shall be such in and through Christ to his Church that the glory of Christ and the mystery of his word shall be far more plain unto them There shall be no material Temple but there shall be the equivalent Temple the Antitype Gods presence in Christ gloriously manifest And his Word more open and plaine then ever since the New Testament All mysteries relating to this time foretold shall be revealed Now shall bee fulfilled that Dan. 12. Knowledge shall be increased And that Isa 11. The earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover the Sea All that men had before in the ear now they shall have in the eye their science shall be turned to experience ¶ 2 All Prophesies relating to the best of Times of the Saints welfare shall now be fulfilled The Saints shall not have these things onely in types visions or knowledge but in possession and happy injoyment The Revelation is the summe of all the Prophets This is declared to John by Christ Rev. 1. sc in a representation And therefore it is said Rev. 22.6 The Lord God of the holy Prophets sent his Angel to shew unto his servants the sayings of the Prophesie of this Booke The intent and meaning is That the Lord God that spake by the Prophets and spake of these things by the Prophets sent by his Angel to explain those things delivered by the Prophets concerning these times of which we speak Now this Book of the Revelation though it be far plainer then the Prophets yet it is not fully and wholly plain to us therefore called A sealed Booke that Christ must open Rev. 5. This opening is by the events Rev. 6. c. which will be compleatly done in this visible glorious time of the Church as we may perceive by the light now at the dawning afore the Sunne of righteousnesse doth arise Christ is the Yea and Amen of all the promises 2 Cor. 1.20 therefore when he appears again all will appear fulfilled As the woman of Samaria said Joh. 4. so it shall be sc when the Messiah commeth which is called the Christ he shall tell us all things yea restore all things Act. 3. Therefore is Christ called the WORD of GOD and the Heire of all things because he will declare and perform all things § 2 What Mr. Bolton saith of everlasting glory in the highest Heaven shall be proportionably true now in this thousand yeers We shall perfectly understand all Physical or natural and spiritual things what is the number of the Heavens The essences of the creaures How we shall know and behold God in Christ c And then shall bee fulfilled all the prayers of Saints put up for the welfare of Church and Saints from the beginning of the world Then shall Sem and Japhet dwell together Then those prayers that gave God no rest till he made Jerusalem a praise shall be answered and all the glorious things that have been spoken of the Church the City of God shall appear in their colours and be given in in great glory As it is said she is the Lords portion Deut. 32.9 His pleasant portion Jer. 12.10 His inheritance Isa 19.25 All people are the worke of his hands but his Church is his Inheritance Again the Church is called the Dearly beloved of his soule Jer. 12.7 His love his dove his undefiled all faire c. Cant. oft His Treasure and peculiar treasure Ex. 19 5. The Lords house of glory Isa 60.7 Yea His glory Isa 46.13 and THE glory of God Jer. 3.17 Nay the Throne of his glory Jer. 14.21 Nay the Crowne of his glory Isa 62.3 Nay the Royal Diadem Ibid. Againe the Church is called The ornament of God the beauty of his ornaments the beauty of his ornament in
12.11 which were to run out saith Huet on Daniel from the ceasing of the daily sacrifice c. afore the Preface to this glorious state begins are now almost expired For if the daily sacrifice ceased about the yeer of Christ 367. For in that yeer saith Alsted in his Chronolog in the Reigne of Julian Apostata the preparations to re-edifie the Temple at Jerusalem were utterly demolished And we adde thereunto the said One thousand two hundred and ninety yeers we shall easily perceive if we credit our common Account making this to be the Yeer of Christ 1653. that the said One thousand two hundred and ninety yeers are almost expired ¶ 2 The two and forty months wherein the Beast Antichrist should have power as some Greek copies read it to do that is as hee pleaseth as Mr. Brightman expounds Rev. 13.5 which are allone with One thousand two hundred and sixty dayes Revelation chap. 11. verse 2. and verse 3. both signifying by the consent of the generality of all learned Protestants One thousand two hundred and sixty yeers are now neer their period For if as Reusner asserts * Elias Reusner Leorin Isagog Historic in Infantia Antichristi Ad annum 410. these two and forty months began when the Hinderer the Roman Emperour was removed 2 Thess 2.6 by the Goths that now the Roman Bishop was free from all impeding his will and pleasure in the yeer of Christ according to our common Account 410. And we adde thereunto the said One thousand two hundred and sixty yeers the termination of the said One thousand two hundred and sixty yeers are not far off I might annumerate many other accounts but I will not so mis-spend time nor anticipate my selfe in my intended designe of computations in the next Chapter These two here named may suffice to give the Reader a taste yea the first fruits of many Computations now not long hence about to determine whose periods immediately precede the beginning of the preparation or introduction viz. the call of the Jews to the glorious time we speak of SECT II. The second Prognostick The might of the Churches Enemies § 1 WHen the might of the Churches enemies appears universally and irresistably powerful then is the Churches great deliverance at hand Isa 59.16 to the end of the Chapter and the whole ensuing Chapter viz. the sixtieth alleadged and demonstrated afore to relate to this glorious time wee speake of Read the place it is too large to write out and you shall there finde it Prophesied that when the Lord should see that there was NONE TO HELP that then his owne arme should bring salvation that then the Redeemer shall come to Zion That then the Church should rise and shine because her light was come and the Gentiles should come into her light That her GATES SHOULD BE OPEN CONTINUALLY NOT SHUT DAY NOR NIGHT AND KINGS SHOULD MINISTER UNTO HER. THAT THE SUN SHOULD BE NO MORE HER LIGHT BUT THE LORD SHOULD BE HER EVERLASTING LIGHT which St. John Rev. 21. applies to the glorious time we treat of with many more passages in those Chapters of Isaiah to the same purpose Adde to this place of Isaiah that in the Revelation Chap. 18. verse 7. and 8. How much she hath glorified her selfe and lived deliciously so much torment and sorrow give her for she saith in her heart I sit A QUEEN AND AM NO WIDOW AND SHAL SEE NO SORROW therefore shall her plagues come IN ONE DAY § 2 Now whether at present the Might of the Churches enemies bee not universal and irresistible the Turke prospering mainly the Popish party prevailing exceedingly and the rather because the Protestant Nations are onely busie in beating one another to peeces most sadly whence most impious corruptions abound among these as horrid and bloody persecutions among those fresh broken out againe in the German Empire and in the Kingdome of France c. so that Antichrist boasted in their late Jubilean solemnity all was his and the Church precisely considered and Religion every way goes to wrack and no remedy of Lawes or Armes appeare I leave the Reader to resolve To which end I would have him weigh what briefly I have hinted and surveigh throughly the present state of things and inlarge his meditation upon it and then he will easily be inabled to conclude whether the universality of all be not most corrupt and unsavoury and daily putrifying more and more and whether the salt wherewith they should be seasoned and preserved hath not lost its savour and then wherewith shall any of those things be salted And whether as Psal 11.3 if the foundations Political saith Mollerus be destroyed a David may not justly cry out what can the righteous doe SECT III. The third Prognosticke The height of the enemies wickednesse § 1 THis Prognosticke we have in Gen. 15. verse 13 14 15. and 16. God said to Abraham know of a surety that thy seed shall be a stranger in a Land that is not theirs and they shall serve them and they shall afflict them foure hundred yeers c. But in the fourth generation they shall come hither again FOR THE INIQUITY OF THE AMORITES IS NOT YET FULL whence it appears that the fulnesse of the iniquity of the Amorites is a Prognostick of the Churches great deliverance out of Egypt so that when that should be full these shall be delivered Whence wee infer by the rule of Proportion that when the iniquity of the universality of the wicked on earth shall bee full that then shall the universality of the Elect have their grand deliverance upon earth This Prognostick that the Reader may see my inference to be good I will shew you in other places of Scripture which apply it immediately to the deliverance wee treat of In Isa 14. the first three verses most evidently as we have before demonstrated relate to the Glorious state on earth we drive at To which is annexed the Prophesie of the Churches triumph over Babylon as the necessary Appendix thereof with great assurance and much elocution and emphasis verse 4. c. to the end of the 18. verse Now what is the Prognostick of their fall but the height of their wickednes in oppression pride c. So verse 4 5 6. Thou shalt take up this Proverb against the King of Babylon and say How hath the oppressor ceased The Lord hath broken the staffe of the wicked and the Scepter of the Rulers HEE WHO SMOTE THE PEOPLE IN WRATH WITH A CONTINUAL STROK He that ruled the Nations in anger is persecuted and none hindereth And verse 12. c. How art thou FALLEN FROM HEAVEN O LUCIFER Sonne of the morning FOR thou hast said in thine heart I WILL ASCEND INTO HEAVEN I WILL EXALT MY THRONE ABOVE THE STARS OF GOD AND SIT UPON THE MOUNT OF THE CONGREGATION I WILL ASCEND ABOVE THE HEIGHT OF THE CLOUDS I WILL BE LIKE THE MOST HIGH thou shalt be BROVGHT DOWNE TO HELL So
our Saviour also testifies to this Prognostick Matth. 24. After the signes to come to passe whiles the end was not yet but were onely the beginnings of sorrow verse 6. verse 8. Christ addes other signes that should more neerly precede and point at the end And amongst many direful signes he gives this INIQUITY SHALL ABOUND after which the Gospel being preached to all the world as a witnesse to them THEN SHALL THE END COME verse 9. to 15. To the same purpose Rev. 18. verse 2 3 4 5 6. Babylon the Great is fallen is fallen that is shall fall as certainly as if already fallen c. FOR HER SINNES HAVE REACHED UNTO HEAVEN § 2 Now whether the enemies wickednesse is not mounted up to the height and the Antichristian parties sinnes I mean all that oppose Christ by what names or titles soever by what way or means or manner soever are not come to the full I leave the well-principled sound sanctified spiritual soul to judge Turcisme and Papisme is now worse then ever by how much more they have of late prevailed and have sinned against greater light and are more encouraged by the enmities and impieties among Protestants The Arminian and Socinian party with their Articuli perpendendi Advancements of mans will Disputes against the Deity of Christ with some questionings of the Holy Ghost have struck in with the Antichristian party and joyning in effect at least their forces with them have greatly enlarged their Quarters The Lutherans still as obstinately as ever if not more obstinately since against more light shining in sundry disputes destroy the humanity of Christ by their doctrine of Consubstantiation The learned of the Jews poor soules are now more obstinate against Christ come in the flesh then ever And for Protestant Nations or Peoples I am utterly astonished in my thoughts and distressed for words to expresse their unparallelable Apostasies The revolt among Professours is generall Their blasphemous words against God Christ the Holy Ghost the Holy Scriptures and consequently against Salvation Heaven Hell the Immortality of the Soule and all Fundamentals are nefanda so wicked that they are not to be mentioned though I could distinctly lest I should leave some staine upon some pious soule that may read this Treatise Their many wicked practices are sutable Community of women swearing drinking c. And these practised by principle as the way to destroy the flesh By this meanes many Jesuits false Prophets false Teachers and damnable Seducers are encouraged as the mutter abroad is every where to creep in amongst them All Religious worship is decried as flesh and forme The wicked prophane are extreamly encouraged the commers on in Religion offended and beaten off And the very knees and hearts of true Saints are made feeble and ready to faint And all this account is brought in as the returne of all the marvells of mercies and miraculary deliverances that God hath given them Whiles Politicals have been recovered Religion hath been lost And whosoever will not be high in these enormities is scorned as low The Nations called Protestant minde conquest rather then conscience Hellish Heresies break out in Print from beyond and on this side the Seas The profession of most of those Countries is come to looke like dirt gain being their godlinesse Their words and promises but lyes and flatteries And selfe is now the great God that ruleth all And of all these I would I could not give so true an account as I can with admiration of Gods patience the meane while I have nor list nor cause maliciously to inveigh against Protestant Nations but out of griefe of soule and to prosecute the point in hand I have given these few hints SECT IV. The fourth Prognostick Wars and rumors of Wars c. THis Prognosticke our Saviour gives us Matth. 24.6 7. in answer to that question put to him by the Disciples verse 3. saying to him Tell us when shall these things be And what shal be the sign of thy comming and of the end of the world But withal he gives us this caution that these wars and rumors of wars are a remoter signe adding to this signe verse 6. That the end is not yet And verse 8. That they are but the beginnings of sorrow But Daniel brings this signe as it may comprehend all great and remarkable wars viz. those the Jewes shall have with their adversaries the Turke c. neerer to the end Dan. 11.44 45. compared with Dan. 12.1 viz. at that time of the Jews wars aforesaid Michael shall stand up to deliver his people though the worke of that deliverance in those wars will it seems by verse 12.13 collated take up the time of five and forty yeers Now I leave all knowing men to judge whether we have not Wars and rumors of Wars whiles most if not all Nations of the Gentiles viz. England Scotland Ireland France Spaine Italy Netherlands or Low-Countries Denmarke Portugal Sweadland Helvetia or Switzerland Poland Muscovy The huge Empire of the Turke The vast Indies c. are either in the practise or posture or preparations and expectations of War There is wanting but the driving and fall of this storme of the Gentiles Wars on the Romish Westerne Antichrist and next the Jews taking up armes against the Turkish Easterne Antichrist and then the Worke or thing signified of which those rumors of Wars are a signe will be doing at least in the Preface and preparation Which last Warre some thinke is not far off in regard of their great Mathematicians wonderfull words to that end their abundant pursing up of gold their writing letters to each other in severall Countries to that purpose their late change of their letter for concealment of their messages by writing The professed expectation of some of their Learned of the Messiah to come in the yeer 1656. or thereabouts SECT V. Giving a touch upon several other Prognosticks viz. THe more we shall see Monarchy to fall Dan. 2.34 35. the oftner there appears strange signes in the Heavens following the great tribulations upon earth Matth. 24.29.30 And the lowder is heard vox populi the voyce of the generality of Gods people in their discourses and prayers that Babylon is falling and the Lord Christ is about to reigne Rev. 19. first six verses the neerer wee may expect the approach of this Glorious state on earth How much of these things have or doe appear already I leave wise men to recall to minde and consider CHAP. III. Containing several Computations of time searching when this glorious state on Earth shall approach § 1 OF which in general I would admonish the Reader First That I shall not trouble my selfe with any Computation whose period is expired because experience hath sufficiently confuted it § 2 Secondly That I would not have him to be troubled at the Computers though he finde their numerary principles different and their Computations inconsistent one with the other but in such darke and difficult